This Owner's Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision or bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against ...
2015
OWNER'S MANUAL
300
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don't drive. Ride with a designated nondrinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Copyright © 2015 FCA US LLC
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1
2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2
3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 3
4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 4
5 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 5
6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437 6
7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465 7
8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529 8
9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537 9
10 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547 10
INTRODUCTION
1
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .6 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .7 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
4 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
This Owner's Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained technicians and genuine parts, and cares about your satisfaction.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle's equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner's Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner's Manual:
INTRODUCTION 5
1
6 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner's Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision or bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do not read this entire Owner's Manual, you may miss important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left front corner of the instrument panel. The VIN is visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This number also appears on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the vehicle registration, and the title.
VIN Location
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is also located on the right front strut tower inside the engine compartment.
INTRODUCTION 7
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS 1
WARNING! Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
VIN Location NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Keyless Push Button Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 Security System Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . .20 Ignition Or Accessory On Message . . . . . . . . . .14 ILLUMINATED ENTRY -- IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .20
SENTRY KEY® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . .21 Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 To Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 To Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM -- IF EQUIPPED . . .18 Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . .24
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .24 TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 TRUNK SAFETY WARNING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM -- IF EQUIPPED . .26 Trunk Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . .44
DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Important Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Seat Belt Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) . . . . . . . .57
Child-Protection Door Lock System -- Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GOTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73 Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . . .94 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94 Transporting Passengers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
2
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and a Keyless Push Button Ignition.
Keyless Push Button Ignition
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition with the push of a button as long as the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is in the passenger compartment.
NOTE: In case the ignition does not change with the push of a button, the RKE transmitter (Key Fob) may have a low or dead battery. In this situation, a back up method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put the nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the Key Fob against the Engine START/STOP button and push to operate the ignition.
The Keyless Push Button Ignition has four operating positions, three of which are labeled and will illuminate when in position. The three positions are: OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The fourth position is START. During start, ON/RUN will illuminate.
Keyless Push Button Ignition
1 -- OFF 2 -- ACC (ACCESSORY) 3 -- ON/RUN
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
Key Fob
The Key Fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in 2 the rear of the Key Fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead. The emergency key is also for locking/unlocking the glove compartment. You can keep the emergency key with you when valet parking.
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch on the back of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand.
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Mechanical Latch On The Back Of The Key Fob
Emergency Key Removal NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key into the lock cylinders with either side up.
Ignition Or Accessory On Message
Opening the driver's door when the ignition is in ACC or ON (engine not running), a chime will sound to remind you
to cycle the ignition to OFF. In addition to the chime, the ignition or accessory on message will display in the cluster.
NOTE: With the Uconnect® system, the power window switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is placed in the OFF position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The time for this feature is programmable. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
WARNING!
· When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
· Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
WARNING! (Continued) · Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or 2 others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector. · Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-GoTM in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. · Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death.
(Continued)
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always remove the Key Fob from vehicle, place the ignition in the OFF and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
SENTRY KEY®
The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
The system uses a Key Fob with a factory-mated Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, a Keyless Push Button Ignition and a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only Key Fobs that are
programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The system will not allow the engine to crank with an invalid Key Fob.
After placing the ignition to the ON/RUN position, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the system. In addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the system. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
· Do not make modifications or alterations to the immobilizer system. Modifications or alterations to
· Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and 2 lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat-
the immobilization system may result in a loss of
tended.
security protection.
· For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-GoTM,
· The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system is not com-
always remember to place the ignition in the OFF
patible with some aftermarket remote starting sys-
position.
tems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection.
NOTE: Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an authorized dealer. This procedure consists of program-
All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have ming a blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Key Fob is one that has never been programmed.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
When having the Sentry Key® Immobilizer System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer.
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Customer Key Programming
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM -- IF EQUIPPED
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer.
General Information
The Sentry Key® system complies with FCC rules part 15 and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions:
· This device may not cause harmful interference.
· This device must accept any interference that may be received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors for unauthorized entry and the Keyless Enter-N-GoTM START/STOP button for unauthorized operation. While the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, interior switches for door locks and decklid release are disabled. If something triggers the alarm, the Vehicle Security Alarm will provide the following audible and visible signals: the horn will pulse, the park lamps and/or turn signals will flash, and the Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash.
Rearming Of The System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn off after 29 seconds, 5 seconds between cycles, up to 8 cycles if the trigger remains active and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
To Arm The System
3. If any doors are open, close them.
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm: To Disarm The System
1. Make sure the vehicles ignition is placed in the "OFF" The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of 2
position (refer to Starting Procedures in Starting the following methods:
And Operating for further information). · Make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF.
· Push the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the vehicle:
· Push LOCK on the interior power door lock switch with the driver and/or passenger door open.
· Push the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the same exterior zone (refer to Keyless Enter-N-GoTM in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information).
· Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle if equipped. Refer to "Keyless Enter-N-GoTM" in "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle" for further information.
· Place the vehicle ignition system in the OFF position.
· Push the Keyless Enter-N-GoTM START/STOP button (requires at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle).
· Push the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
· The driver's door key cylinder and the trunk button on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
· When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously described arming sequences has occurred, the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
exterior lights will flash, the horn will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
Security System Manual Override
The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the doors using the manual door lock plunger.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY -- IF EQUIPPED
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the doors or open any door.
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the outside mirrors (if equipped).
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds, or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position from the OFF position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
NOTE:
NOTE: Driving at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above
· The front courtesy overhead console and door courtesy lights will turn on if the dimmer control is in the
disables the system from responding to all RKE transmitter buttons for all RKE transmitters.
2
"Dome ON" position (extreme top position).
· The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the dimmer control is in the "Dome defeat" position (extreme bottom position).
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors, open the trunk, or activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held Key Fob with RKE transmitter. The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.
Key Fob With RKE Transmitter
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Unlock The Doors
Flash Lights With Lock
Push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver's door or twice within five seconds to unlock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The illuminated entry system will also turn on.
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the current setting, refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to "Keyless Enter-N-GoTM" under "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle" for further information.
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver's door or all doors on the first push of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the current setting, refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
Headlight Illumination On Approach
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter. The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles equipped through Uconnect®. To change the current setting, refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
To Lock The Doors
Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter to lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash, and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to Using The Panic Alarm
"Keyless Enter-N-GoTM" under "Things To Know Before To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push and hold
Starting Your Vehicle" for further information.
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one 2
Sound Horn With Lock
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is activated,
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
the turn signals will flash, the horn will pulse on and off, and the interior lights will turn on.
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting, The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your you turn it off by either pushing the PANIC button a
Instrument Panel" for further information.
second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 MPH
To Unlatch The Trunk
(24 km/h) or greater.
Push the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two NOTE:
times within five seconds to unlatch the trunk.
· The interior lights will turn off if you place the ignition
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to "Keyless Enter-N-GoTM" under "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle" for further information.
in the ACC or ON/RUN position while the Panic Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights and horn will remain on.
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
· You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted by the system.
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical latch on the back of the RKE transmitter sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand.
Programming Additional Transmitters
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer.
Transmitter Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032 battery.
NOTE:
· Perchlorate Material -- special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
· Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board.
Emergency Key Removal
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a #2 flat blade screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves
of the RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage the seal during removal.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
on the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause 2 battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two halves together.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions:
Separating The RKE Transmitter Case
3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over (battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign
· This device may not cause harmful interference.
· This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance, check for these two conditions:
1. A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of the battery is a minimum of three years.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.
NOTE:
· The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
· Obstructions between the vehicle and RKE transmitter may reduce this range.
How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start: · Vehicle in PARK
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM -- IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security. The system has a range of approximately 300 ft (91 m).
· Doors closed · Hood closed · Trunk closed · Hazard switch off · Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)
· Battery at an acceptable charge level
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
Remote Start Abort Message
· RKE panic button not pushed
The following messages will display in the instrument
· System not disabled from previous remote start event
cluster if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prematurely:
2
· Vehicle security alarm not active
· Remote Start Aborted -- Door Ajar
· Ignition in OFF position
· Remote Start Aborted -- Hood Ajar
WARNING!
· Remote Start Aborted -- Trunk Ajar
· Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled.
· Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters away from children. Operation of the Remote Start System, windows, door locks or other controls could cause serious injury or death.
· Remote Start Aborted -- Fuel Low · Remote Start Disabled -- Start Vehicle To Reset
The instrument cluster message stays active until the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN position.
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Push and release the REMOTE START button on the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, parking lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice (if programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.
NOTE:
· If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
· The engine can be started two consecutive times (two 15-minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However, the ignition must be cycled to the RUN position before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The Vehicle
Push and release the REMOTE START button one time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will disable the one time push of the REMOTE START button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request.
· The park lamps will turn on and remain on during Remote Start mode.
· For security, power window and power sunroof operation (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
Before the end of 15-minute cycle, push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the
doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle, push and release the START/STOP button.
NOTE: The message "Push Start Button" will display in the DID until you push the START button.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
2
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
To lock each door, push the door lock knob on each door trim panel downward. To unlock the front doors, pull the inside door handle to the first detent. To unlock the rear doors, pull the door lock knob on the door trim panel upward.
Door Lock Knob
If the door lock knob is down when you shut the door, the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the Key Fob is not inside the vehicle before closing the door.
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
· For personal security and safety in the event of a collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
· When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the keyless ignition node is in the "OFF" mode, remove the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
· Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
WARNING! (Continued) · Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-GoTM in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Power Door Locks
A power door lock switch is on each front door trim panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
If you push the power door lock switch while the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, and any front door is open, the power locks will not operate. This prevents 2 you from accidentally locking the Key Fob in the vehicle. Placing the ignition in the OFF position or closing the door will allow the locks to operate. If a door is open, and the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, a chime will sound as a reminder to remove the Key Fob.
Automatic Door Locks -- If Equipped
Power Door Lock Switch
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the Keyless Enter-N-GoTM (Passive Entry) system. Refer to "Keyless Enter-N-GoTM" under "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle" for further information.
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer per written request of the customer. Please see your authorized dealer for service.
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is enabled.
2. The vehicle was in motion, then speed returned to 0 mph (0 km/h) and the transmission is placed in PARK.
Child-Protection Door Lock System -- Rear Doors
To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with Child-Protection Door Lock system.
To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection Door Lock System
1. Open the rear door.
3. The driver door is opened. 4. The doors were not previously unlocked. Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key into the lock and rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
To change the current setting, refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in accordance with local laws.
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision. Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are engaged (locked).
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
NOTE: For emergency exit from the rear seats when the Child-Protection Door Lock System is engaged, manually raise the door lock knob to the unlocked position, roll 2 down the window, and open the door using the outside door handle.
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GOTM
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the vehicle's Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a feature of Keyless Enter-N-GoTM. This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle's door(s) without having to push the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
· Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
· If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower response time.
· If the vehicle is unlocked by the Passive Entry Door Handle and no door goes ajar within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock and if equipped will arm the security alarm.
To Unlock From The Driver's Side
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver's door handle, grab the front driver door handle to unlock the driver's door automatically. The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
NOTE: If "Unlock All Doors 1st Press" is programmed, all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front driver's door handle. To select between "Unlock Driver Door 1st Press" and "Unlock All Doors 1st Press," refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
To Unlock From The Passenger Side
FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with passive entry.
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front
There are three situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe search in any passive entry vehicle.
2
passenger door handle to unlock all four doors automati- 1. A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry RKE
cally. The interior door panel lock knob will raise when transmitter while a door is ajar.
the door is unlocked.
2. A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger handle while a door is ajar.
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver's door unlock preference setting ("Unlock Driver Door 1st Press" or "Unlock All Doors 1st Press").
3. A lock request is made by the door panel switch while the door is ajar.
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE Transmitter In Vehicle
When any of these situations occur, after all ajar doors are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it finds a Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside the car and it does
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a not find any Passive Entry RKE transmitters outside the
Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the car, then the car will unlock and alert the customer.
Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door
unlock feature which will function if the ignition switch
is in the OFF position.
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The vehicle will only unlock the doors when the doors are locked using the door panel switch, a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter is detected inside the vehicle, and no valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter is detected outside the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock the doors when any of the following conditions are true:
To Enter The Trunk
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft (1.0 m) of the deck lid, push the button on the right side of CHMSL (Center High Mounted Stop Light), which is located on the deck lid.
· The doors are locked manually using the door lock knobs.
· There is a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter outside the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either Passive Entry door handle.
· Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the door panel switch and then close the doors.
Trunk Passive Entry Button
NOTE: If you inadvertently leave your vehicle's Passive Entry RKE transmitter in the trunk and try to close the deck lid, the deck lid will automatically unlatch, unless another one of the vehicle's Passive Entry RKE transmitters is outside the vehicle and within 3 ft (1.0 m) of the deck lid.
To Lock The Vehicle's Doors
With one of the vehicle's Passive Entry RKE transmitters within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door handles, push the door handle LOCK button to lock all four doors.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
2
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Do NOT grab the door handle when pushing the door handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).
NOTE:
· After pushing the door handle button, you must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors, using either Passive Entry door handle. This is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the door handle, without the vehicle reacting and unlocking.
· The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE transmitter battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the vehicle's interior door panel.
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
WINDOWS
There are single window controls on each passenger door
Power Windows The window controls on the driver's door control all the
trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows. The window controls will operate only when the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
2
door windows.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Uconnect®, the
power window switches will remain active for up to 10
minutes after the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The
time is programmable. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in
"Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further in-
formation.
Power Window Switches
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do not let children play with power windows. Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
(Continued)
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-NGoTM in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
AUTO-Down Feature
To stop the window from going all the way down during the AUTO-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
AUTO-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection -- If Equipped
Lift the window switch to the second detent, release, and the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the AUTO-up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
The driver door power window switch and some model passenger door power window switches have an AUTOdown feature. Push the window switch to the second detent, release, and the window will go down automatically.
To open the window part way, push the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop.
NOTE:
· If the window runs into any obstacle during autoclosure, it will reverse direction and then go back down. Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the window.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
· Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger 3. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during auto- detent to open the window completely and continue
closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold to close the window manually.
to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds 2 after the window is fully open.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the window before closing.
Reset Auto-Up Should the Auto Up feature stop working, the window may need to be reset. To reset Auto Up:
1. Make sure the door is fully closed.
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver's door trim panel allows you to disable the window controls on the rear passenger doors and the rear sunscreen (if equipped). To disable the window controls and the rear sunscreen, push and release the window lockout button (setting it in the DOWN position). To enable the window controls and the rear sunscreen, push and release the window lockout button again (setting it in the UP position).
2. Pull the window switch up to close the window completely and continue to hold the switch up for an additional two seconds after the window is closed.
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting.
TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE
The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by pushing the TRUNK RELEASE button located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel.
Window Lockout Switch Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
NOTE: The transmission must be in PARK before the With the ignition in the OFF position, the Trunk Open
button will operate.
symbol will display until the trunk is closed.
Refer to "Keyless Enter-N-GoTM" in "Things To Know 2
The trunk lid can be released from Before Starting Your Vehicle" for further information on
outside the vehicle by pushing the trunk operation with the Passive Entry feature.
TRUNK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter TRUNK SAFETY WARNING
twice within five seconds or by using the external release switch
WARNING!
Trunk Release Button
located on the underside of the decklid overhang. The release feature will function only when the vehicle is in the unlock condition.
Do not allow children to have access to the trunk, either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in
With the ignition in the ON/RUN position, the Trunk the trunk, young children may not be able to escape,
Open symbol will display in the instrument cluster even if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped
indicating that the trunk is open. The odometer display in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or
will reappear once the trunk is closed.
heat stroke.
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Trunk Emergency Release
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
As a security measure, a Trunk Internal Emergency Release lever is built into the trunk latching mechanism. In the event of an individual being locked inside the trunk, the trunk can be opened by actuating the glow-in-the-dark handle attached to the trunk latching mechanism.
Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems:
· Seat Belt Systems
· Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
· Child Restraints
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in this section. It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
Trunk Emergency Internal Release
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing 6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat, shoulder belts properly.
move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint. (Refer to "Child Restraints")
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front
2
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle Air Bags room to inflate.
seat belt properly (Refer to Child Restraints) should be secured in a vehicle with a rear seat in child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use child restraints or beltpositioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space between the occupant and the door and the occupant could be injured.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
5. You should read the instructions provided with your under If You Need Assistance.
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
· Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
· Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat.
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and could cause a collision that includes you. This can happen far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert)
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and outboard front passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The feature is active whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. If the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard front seat belts are buckled.
The BeltAlert warning sequence begins after the vehicle speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h) by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime. Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire duration or until the respective seat belts are buckled.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your autho-
Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts rized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deacti-
are buckled. The driver should instruct all other occu- vating BeltAlert.
2
pants to buckle their seat belts. If an outboard front seat belt is unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), BeltAlert will provide both audio and visual notification.
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the driver's or outboard front passenger's (if equipped with BeltAlert) seat belt remains unbuckled.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
object is on the outboard front passenger seat or when the lap/shoulder belts.
seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt
will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
· Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, the air bags won't deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even though you have air bags.
· In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly.
· It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) · Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. · Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. · Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too. · Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt. People belted together can crash into one another in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person, no matter what their size.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) · A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won't be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as possible and keep it snug. · A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If you can't straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed. · A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the buckle nearest you.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
WARNING! (Continued) · A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far 2 forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly. · A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs aren't as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision. · A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision. You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together.
(Continued)
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued) · A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go around your lap.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust the seat.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click."
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
2
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
Positioning The Lap Belt
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/ shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing. The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and front passenger seats, the top of the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage, and move it up or down to the position that serves you best.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward 2 position without pushing or squeezing the release button. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into position.
Seat Belt Extender
Adjustable Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position, and if you are taller than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a higher position. After you release the anchorage button, try to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in position.
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant, it must be removed.
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
· ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically required in order to properly fit the original seat belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if, when worn, the distance between the front edge of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of the occupant's body is LESS than 6 inches.
· Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can increase the risk of serious injury or death in a collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the lap belt is not long enough and only use in the recommended seating positions. Remove and store the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the seat belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible. Keep the seat belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision. These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by removing slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re- Restraints" section of this manual. The table below
straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten- defines the type of feature for each seating position.
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
2
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy Management feature in the front seating positions that may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a collision. This seat belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner.
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) -- If Equipped
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions may be equipped with Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) which are used to secure a child restraint system. For additional information, refer to "Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt" under the "Child
· ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant's mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a ratcheting sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occupant's mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click.
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked. The seat belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a seating position that has a seat belt with this feature. Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.
WARNING!
· Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
· Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
WARNING! (Continued)
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child restraints that have a harness for restraining 2 the child.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
WARNING!
Air Bag System Components
· The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the proce-
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag system components:
· Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
dures in the Service Manual. · Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
increase the risk of injury in collisions. · Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is
· Air Bag Warning Light · Steering Wheel and Column · Instrument Panel · Knee Impact Bolsters
· Advanced Front Air Bags (Continued)
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
· Supplemental Side Air Bags
· Supplemental Knee Air Bags
· Front and Side Impact Sensors
· Seat Belt Pretenioners
· Seat Belt Buckle Switch
· Seat Track Position Sensors
Advanced Front Air Bags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver's Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The passenger's Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The words "SRS AIRBAG" or "AIRBAG" are embossed on the air bag covers.
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
1 -- Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags 2 -- Passenger Knee Impact Bolster 3 -- Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag/Knee Bolster
WARNING!
· Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment could cause serious injury, including death. Air bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel.
· Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
· Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides 2 output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive information from the front impact sensors or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon seat position.
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags.
WARNING!
· No objects should be placed over or near the air bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel, because any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the air bags to inflate.
· Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers or attempt to open them manually. You may damage the air bags and you could be injured because the air bags may no longer be functional. The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
designed to open only when the air bags are inflating. · Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, air bags won't deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even though you have air bags.
Advanced Front Air Bag Operation
Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Advanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions, including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage -- for example, some pole collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The Advanced
impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes Front Air Bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to
with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while 2
severe initial deceleration.
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in position, away from an inflating air bag.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and front passenger, and position the front occupants for improved interaction with the Advanced Front Air Bags.
WARNING!
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Air Bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the
· Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact bolsters in any way.
· Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios, etc.
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the steering column. The Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag provides enhanced protection during a frontal impact by working together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and Advanced Front Air Bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Your vehicle is equipped with two types of side air bags:
1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs): Located in the outboard side of the front seats. The SABs are marked with a "SRS AIRBAG" or "AIRBAG" label sewn into the outboard side of the seats.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury during certain side impact and certain rollover events, in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body structure.
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard side of the seatback's trim cover. The inflating SAB deploys through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure you if you are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
2
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance could be adversely affected and/or objects could be pushed into you, causing serious injury.
2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs): Located above the side windows. The trim covering the SABICs is labeled "SRS AIRBAG" or "AIRBAG."
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) Label Location
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head injury to front and rear seat outboard occupants. SABICs may reduce the risk of injuries in certain side impact and vehicle
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
rollover events, in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body structure.
The SABICs deploy downward, covering the side windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the trim out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs inflate with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in certain rollover or side impact events.
WARNING!
· Your vehicle is equipped with left and right Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs). Do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the deployment of the SABICs. The trim covering above the side windows where the SABIC and its deployment path are located should remain free from any obstructions.
· Your vehicle is equipped with SABICs. In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not install any accessory items in your vehicle which could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
The SABICs and SABs ("Side Air Bags") are designed to help keep you in position, away from inflating Side Air
activate in certain side impacts and certain rollover Bags. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags,
events. The Occupant Restraint Controller ("ORC") de- occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit 2 termines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in upright with their backs against the seats. Children must
a particular side impact or rollover event is appropriate, be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat
based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle that is appropriate for the size of the child.
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags should have deployed.
WARNING!
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to blink your eyes. Occupants, including children, who are up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or area where the Side Air Bags inflate, even if they are in an infant or child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also
· Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean against the door or window. Sit upright in the center of the seat.
· Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed.
· Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
(Continued)
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued) properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won't deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even though you have Side Air Bags.
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions, including some collisions at certain angles, or some side collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled or offset frontal collisions where the Advanced Front Air Bags deploy.
Rollover Events
Side Impacts
In side impacts, the side impact sensors aid the ORC in determining the appropriate response to impact events. The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right side impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only.
Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover events. The ORC determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events. The rollover sensing-system determines if a rollover event may be in progress and whether deployment is appropriate. A slower-developing event may deploy the seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle. A
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
faster-developing event may deploy the seat belt preten- deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to fric-
sioners as well as the SABs and SABICs on both sides of tion rope burns or those you might get sliding along a
the vehicle. The rollover sensing-system may also deploy the seat belt pretensioners, with or without the SABs and
carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by 2 contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and
SABICs, on both sides of the vehicle if the vehicle normally heal quickly. However, if you haven't healed
experiences a near rollover event.
significantly within a few days, or if you have any
If A Deployment Occurs
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment.
blistering, see your doctor immediately.
· As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
the air bag system.
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any or all of the following may occur:
· The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer's instructions for cleaning.
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller System serviced as well.
NOTE:
· Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
· After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions:
· Cut off fuel to the engine.
· Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition switch is turned to the "OFF" position.
· Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition switch is turned to the "OFF" position.
· Unlock the doors automatically.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
System Reset Procedure
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
functions after an event, the ignition must be changed it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
2
from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
Air Bag Warning Light
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition switch is first turned to
The air bags must be ready to inflate for your protection in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with air bag system electrical components.
the ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on again after initial startup.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch is in the OFF position or in the ACC position, the air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is detected that could affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction. While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.
· The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first turned to the ON/RUN position.
· The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight-second interval.
· The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won't have the air bags to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first placed in the on position, and stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is detected, which could affect the Supplemental Restraint System ("SRS"), the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will illuminate on the instrument panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single chime will sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light has come on and a fault has been detected. If the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. For additional information regarding the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light refer to the "Instrument Panel" section of this manual.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
· Modifications to any part of the air bag system could cause it to fail when you need it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to protect you. Do not modify the components or wiring, including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
WARNING! (Continued)
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
2
· It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
· Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the air bag system for persons with dis-
abilities, contact your authorized dealer.
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
How fast the vehicle was traveling
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
Child Restraints
WARNING! (Continued)
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all great that you could not hold the child, no matter
times, including babies and children.
how strong you are. The child and others could be 2
Every state in the United States, and every Canadian badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
province, requires that small children ride in proper should be in a proper restraint for the child's size.
restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owner's Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner's
WARNING!
Manual and on all the labels attached to the child restraint.
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so
(Continued)
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards. You should also make sure that you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it.
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
· For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org or call 1866SEATCHECK. Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada's website for additional information:
· http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/roadsafety/safedriverschildsafety-index-53.htm
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Infants and Toddlers Small Children
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age
Children who are two years old or younger and who have not
reached the height or weight limits of their child restraint
Children who are at least two years old or who have out-grown the height or weight limit of their
rear-facing child restraint
Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint, facing
rearward in the rear seat of the vehicle
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point Harness, facing forward in the rear seat of the ve-
hicle
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
Larger Children
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Recommended Type Of Child Re-
Age
straint
Children who have out-grown
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and 2
their forward-facing child restraint, the vehicle seat belt, seated in the
but are too small to properly fit
rear seat of the vehicle
the vehicle's seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger, who have out-grown the height or weight limit of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle
Infants And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until they reach the
weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old. Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat.
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
· Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
· Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardfacing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle's seat belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle's seat cushion while the child's back is against the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
· Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer's
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. · After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward because it can loosen the child restraint attachments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint. · When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend 2 over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle's seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child's knees bend comfortably over the front of the vehicle seat while they are still sitting all the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child's shoulder between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching the child's thighs and not their stomach?
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was "no," then the child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched. A child's squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt will not protect a child properly, which may result in serious injury or death. A child must always wear both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
Restraint Type
Combined
Use any attachment method shown with an "X" Below
2
Weight of the
LATCH
Seat Belt Only
LATCH
Seat Belt + Top
Child + Child Lower Anchors
Lower Anchors Tether Anchor
Restraint
Only
+ Top Tether
Anchor
Rear-Facing
Up to 65 lbs
X
X
Child Restraint
(29.5 kg)
Rear-Facing
More than
X
Child Restraint 65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Forward-Facing Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg)
X
X
Forward-Facing
More than
X
Child Restraint 65 lbs (29.5 kg)
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children (LATCH) Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCHequipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the seating position. These anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle's seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the following table for more information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
2
· Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating position
· Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
What is the weight limit (child's weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach the child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat
No
belt be used together to attach a rear-
facing or forward-facing child restraint?
Can two child restraints be attached using
No
a common lower LATCH anchorage?
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system once the combined weight
is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-
facing or forward-facing child restraint.
Never "share" a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchor-
ages in an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat?
Can the head restraints be removed? Locating LATCH Anchorages
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the
front passenger seat if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact. See your 2 child restraint owner's manual for more
information.
Yes
Center position only may be removed.
The lower anchorages are round bars that are found at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback, below the anchorage symbols on the seatback. They are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
LATCH Anchorages
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Locating Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seating position located in the panel between the rear seatback and the rear window. They are found under a plastic cover with the tether anchorage symbol on it.
Tether Strap Anchorages LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side. Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end Always follow the directions of the child restraint manu-
to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten facturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
restraint systems will be installed as described here.
2
Center Seat LATCH
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
If a child restraint installed in the center position blocks the seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard position, do not use that outboard position. If a child seat in the center position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or seat belt, do not install a child seat in that outboard position.
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more than one child restraint. Please refer to "Installing The LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint System" for typical installation instructions.
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt, following the instructions below. See the section "Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt" to check what type of seat belt each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap of the child seat so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for that seating position. For some second row seats, you may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make room for the child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the top tether anchorage. See the section "Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage" for directions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by other occupants or being used to secure child restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before installing a child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of the child's reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with them.
WARNING!
· Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer's directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
· Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are 2 equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be "switched" into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into the retractor. Refer to the "Automatic Locking Mode" description under "Occupant Restraints" for additional information on ALR.
88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems for Installing Child Restraints in this Vehicle
· ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor · Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89
What is the weight limit (child's Weight limit of the Child Restraint Always use the tether anchor when
weight + weight of the child re-
using the seat belt to install a for-
straint) for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a forward
ward facing child restraint, up to 2 the recommended weight limit of
facing child restraint?
the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint
Yes
Contact between the front passen-
touch the back of the front passen-
ger seat and the child restraint is
ger seat?
allowed, if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the head restraints be re-
Yes
Center Only may be removed.
moved?
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
No
tighten the seat belt against the belt
path of the child restraint?
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR re-
tractor.
90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position. For some second row seats, you may need to recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make room for the child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click."
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is locked, you should not be able to pull out any webbing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint while you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See the section "Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage" for directions to attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the seat belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91
WARNING! (Continued)
(LATCH) Restraint System" for the location of ap-
proved tether anchorages in your vehicle.
2
WARNING! Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to any location in front of the car seat, including the seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage that is approved for that seating position, located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the section "Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren
(Continued)
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage. You may need to move the seat forward to provide better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top tether anchorage for that seating position, move the child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is available.
92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Rotate or lift the cover to access the anchor directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint.
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible, route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard side of the head restraint.
Tether Strap Mounting
1 -- Cover 3 -- Attaching Strap
A -- Tether Strap Hook B -- Tether Anchor
4. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93
5. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child 2. Route the tether strap over the seatback and head
restraint manufacturer's instructions.
restraint.
WARNING!
· An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child. Use only the anchorage position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap.
· If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat, make sure the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to 2 the center tether anchorage located in the panel between the rear seatback and the rear window.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision.
Center Tether Attachment
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts. 1. Lower the adjustable center head restraint to the full
down position.
94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in. Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to "Maintenance Procedures" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle."
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may result.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be considered a normal part of the break-in and not interpreted as a problem.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA.
WARNING!
· Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death.
· It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
· Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
· Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
2
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips: · Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area. · If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/ rear doors open, make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
(Continued)
96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued) · If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The light should come on and remain on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is
not lit during starting, see your authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes on while driving, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed. You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield. See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97
WARNING!
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of 2 vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury. · Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners. · Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle. · Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top of already installed floor mats. Additional floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
(Continued)
98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued) · Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always
properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning. · Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control. · If required, mounting posts must be properly installed, if not equipped from the factory. Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or mounting can cause interference with the brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of control of the vehicle.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges. Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel, engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be located and corrected immediately.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99
2
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS 3 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108 Power Folding Outside Mirrors --
Automatic Dimming Mirror -- If Equipped . . .108
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 Heated Mirrors -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature --
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors -- If Equipped . . .118
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 "Slide-On-Rod" And Extender Features Of
Driver's Automatic Dimming Mirror --
Sun Visor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) --
Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal And Approach
IF EQUIPPED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Lighting -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 Rear Cross Path. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Tilt Mirrors In Reverse -- If Equipped . . . . . . .115 Modes Of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116 General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . .146
Power Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129 LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
Power Lumbar -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .132 Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
Heated Seats -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 Automatic Headlights -- If Equipped . . . . . . .148
Front Ventilated Seats -- If Equipped . . . . . . .136 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136 Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140 DRIVER MEMORY SEAT -- IF EQUIPPED . . . .142 Programming The Memory Feature . . . . . . . . .143 Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless
Entry Transmitter To Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . .143 Memory Position Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144 Easy Entry/Exit Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Adaptive Bi-Xenon High Intensity Discharge Headlights -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Daytime Running Lights (DRL). . . . . . . . . . . .151
Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Fog Lights -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154 Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154 Rain Sensing Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162 3
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154 TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN . . .164
Front Map/Reading Lights -- If Equipped . . .155
POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN -- IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Courtesy Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156 HEATED STEERING WHEEL -- IF EQUIPPED . .166
Ambient Light -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .156 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS -- IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .167
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL --
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . .159 IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160 To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160 To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161 To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Setting The Following Distance In ACC . . . . . .183
To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171 Overtake Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173 ACC Operation At Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) -- IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation . . . .176 Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC). . . .177 To Activate/Deactivate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177 To Set A Desired ACC Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu . . . . . . .188 Display Warnings And Maintenance . . . . . . . .189 Precautions While Driving With ACC . . . . . . .192 General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196 Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
To Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179 To Turn Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180 To Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180 To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) WITH MITIGATION -- IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Turning FCW ON Or OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Changing FCW And Active Braking Status. . . .203
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense® . . . . . . . .221
FCW Limited Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204 Service The ParkSense® Park Assist System . . .222
Service FCW Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204 LANESENSE -- IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
Cleaning The ParkSense® System . . . . . . . . . .223 ParkSense® System Usage Precautions. . . . . . .223 3
LaneSense Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204 Turning LaneSense ON Or OFF. . . . . . . . . . . .205 LaneSense Warning Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . .206 Changing LaneSense Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210 PARKSENSE® FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST -- IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA -- IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
OVERHEAD CONSOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227 Front Map/Reading Lights -- If Equipped . . .228 Courtesy Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229 Sunglasses Bin Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
ParkSense® Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211 GARAGE DOOR OPENER -- IF EQUIPPED . . .230
ParkSense® Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . .211 Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® . .231
ParkSense® Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212 Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . .233
Opening Power Shade -- Manual Mode . . . . .240
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . .235 Closing Power Shade -- Express . . . . . . . . . . .241
Using HomeLink® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236 Closing Power Shade -- Manual Mode . . . . . .241
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236 Venting Sunroof -- Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237 Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238 Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
COMMANDVIEW® SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE -- IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238 Opening Sunroof -- Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239 Opening Sunroof -- Manual Mode . . . . . . . . .239 Closing Sunroof -- Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240 Closing Sunroof -- Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . .240 Opening Power Shade -- Express . . . . . . . . . .240
Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242 Ignition OFF Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . .242 CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246 Front Seat Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246 Rear Seat Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248 STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
Glove Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
Grocery Bag Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250 Cargo Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
Door Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252 REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256 Rear Seat Armrest Storage -- If Equipped . . . .253 Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256 3
Cargo Area -- Vehicles Equipped With 60/40
Power Sunshade -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .257
Split-Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253 LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM -- IF EQUIPPED . .258
CARGO AREA FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
Trunk Mat -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Automatic Dimming Mirror -- If Equipped
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the windshield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
· The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature can be turned on or off using the Uconnect® System. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you.
NOTE:
· The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is disabled when the vehicle is in reverse gear to improve rear view viewing.
Automatic Dimming Mirror If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an ASSIST and
a 9-1-1 button.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
NOTE: The ASSIST and 911 features operate through · Vehicle Customer Care Total support for all other
the Uconnect® Access service. These buttons will only vehicle issues.
operate as long as your Uconnect® Access service is 9-1-1 Call active. Refer to your "Uconnect® System supplement
manual" for further information.
1. Push the 9-1-1 Call button on the Rearview Mirror. 3
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you to any one of the following support centers:
· Roadside Assistance If you get a flat tire, or need a tow, just push the Assist button and you'll be connected to someone who can help. Roadside Assistance will know what vehicle you're driving and its location. Additional fees may apply for roadside Assistance.
· Uconnect® Access Customer Care In-vehicle support for Uconnect® Access and Uconnect® Access Via Mobile features.
NOTE: In case the 9-1-1 Call button is pushed in error, there will be a 10 second delay before the 9-1-1 Call system initiates a call to a 9-1-1 operator. To cancel the 9-1-1 Call connection, push the 9-1-1 Call button on the Rearview Mirror or push the cancellation button on the Phone Screen. Termination of the 9-1-1 Call will turn the green LED light on the Rearview Mirror off.
2. The LED light located between the Assist and 9-1-1 buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a connection to a 9-1-1 operator has been made.
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a 9-1-1 operator is made, the 9-1-1 Call system may transmit the following important vehicle information to a 9-1-1 operator: · Indication that the occupant placed a 9-1-1 Call.
· The vehicle brand.
· The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.
4. You should be able to speak with the 9-1-1 operator through the vehicle audio system to determine if additional help is needed.
NOTE: Once a connection is made between the vehicle's 9-1-1 Call system and the 9-1-1 operator, the 9-1-1 operator may be able to open a voice connection with the vehicle to determine if additional help is needed. Once the 9-1-1 operator opens a voice connection with the vehicle's 9-1-1 Call system, the operator should be able to speak with you or other vehicle occupants and hear sounds occurring in the vehicle. The vehicle's 9-1-1 Call system will attempt to remain connected with the 9-1-1 operator until the 9-1-1 operator terminates the connection.
5. The 9-1-1 operator may attempt to contact appropriate emergency responders and provide them with important vehicle information and GPS coordinates.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
WARNING!
· If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions or location), do not wait for voice contact from a 9-1-1 operator. All occupants should exit the vehicle immediately and move to a safe location.
· The 9-1-1 Call system is embedded into the vehicle's electrical system. Do not add aftermarket electrical equipment to the vehicle's electrical system. This may prevent your vehicle from sending a signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid interference that can cause the 9-1-1 Call system to fail, never add aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle's electrical system or modify the antennas on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING
WARNING! (Continued)
DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE
UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND SERVICES,
AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT OPERATE. · Modifications to any part of the 9-1-1 Call system
3
could cause the air bag system to fail when you
need it. You could be injured if the air bag system
is not there to help protect you.
9-1-1 Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico DO NOT have 9-1-1 Call system capabilities.
9-1-1 or other emergency line operators in Canada and Mexico may not answer or respond to 9-1-1 system calls.
(Continued)
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If the 9-1-1 Call system detects a malfunction, any of the following may occur at the time the malfunction is detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
· The Rearview Mirror light located between the Assist and 9-1-1 buttons will continuously be illuminated red.
· The Phone Screen will display the following message "Vehicle phone requires service. Please contact your dealer."
· An In-Vehicle Audio message will state "Vehicle phone requires service. Please contact your dealer."
WARNING!
· Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you will not have 9-1-1 Call services. If the Rearview Mirror light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer service the 9-1-1 Call system immediately.
WARNING! (Continued) · The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on
the Air Bag Warning Light on the instrument panel if a malfunction in any part of the system is detected. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, the air bag system may not be working properly and the 9-1-1 system may not be able to send a signal to a 9-1-1 operator. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer service the ORC system immediately.
Even if the 9-1-1 Call system is fully functional, factors beyond FCA US LLC's control may prevent or stop the 9-1-1 Call system operation. These include, but are not limited to, the following factors:
· Delayed accessories mode is active.
· The ignition is in the OFF position.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
· The vehicle's electrical systems are not intact.
NOTE: Never place anything on or near the vehicle's
· The 9-1-1 Call system software and/or hardware are wireless and GPS antennas. You could prevent wireless
damaged during a crash.
and GPS signal reception, which can prevent your vehicle
· The vehicle battery loses power or becomes discon-
from placing an emergency call. Wireless and GPS signal reception is required for the 9-1-1 Call system to function
3
nected during a vehicle crash.
properly.
· Wireless and/or Global Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or obstructed.
· Equipment malfunction at the 9-1-1 operator facility.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
· Operator error by the 9-1-1 operator.
This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
· Wireless network congestion.
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
· Weather.
· Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels.
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
WARNING!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean.
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s) to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.
NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the lane next to your vehicle.
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are. Relying too much on your passenger side convex mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature -- If Equipped
Some models have outside mirrors that are hinged. The hinge allows the mirror to pivot forward and rearward to resist damage. The hinge has three detent positions: full forward, full rearward and normal.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
Driver's Automatic Dimming Mirror -- If Equipped The fourth LED supplies illuminated entry lighting,
This feature is controlled by the inside automatic dim- which turns on in both mirrors when you use the Remote
ming mirror and will automatically adjust for headlight Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or open any door. This
glare when the inside mirror adjusts.
LED shines outward to illuminate the front and rear door
handles. It also shines downward to illuminate the area 3
NOTE: This feature is also available on the passenger's in front of the doors.
side when equipped with turn signal and approach lighting.
The Illuminated Entry lighting fades to off after about 30 seconds or it will fade to off immediately once the
Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal And Approach ignition is placed into the RUN position.
Lighting -- If Equipped
NOTE: The approach lighting will not function when the
Driver and passenger outside mirrors with turn signal gear selector is moved out of the PARK position.
and approach lighting contain four LEDs, which are located in the upper outer corner of each mirror.
Tilt Mirrors In Reverse -- If Equipped
Three of the LEDs are turn signal indicators, which flash with the corresponding turn signal lights in the front and rear of the vehicle. Turning on the Hazard Warning flashers will also activate these LEDs.
Tilt Mirrors in Reverse provides automatic outside mirror positioning which will aid the driver's view of the ground rearward of the front doors. The outside mirrors will move slightly downward from the present position when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. The outside
mirrors will then return to the original position when the
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
vehicle is shifted out of the REVERSE position. Each stored memory setting will have an associated Tilt Mirrors in Reverse position.
NOTE: The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not turned on when delivered from the factory. The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature can be turned on and off using the Uconnect® System. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
Power Mirrors
The power mirror controls are located on the driver's door trim panel.
Power Mirror Control
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select buttons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a mirror, push either the L (left) or R (right) button to select the mirror that you want to adjust.
NOTE: A light in the select button will illuminate indicating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
Using the mirror control switch, push on any of the four NOTE: If the vehicle speed is greater than 10 mph
arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to (16 km/h) the folding feature will be disabled.
move.
If the mirrors are in the folded position, and vehicle
Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by speed is equal or greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), they
the optional Memory Seat Feature. Refer to "Driver will automatically unfold.
3
Memory Seat" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle" for further information.
Heated Mirrors -- If Equipped
Power Folding Outside Mirrors -- If Equipped
The switch for the power folding mirrors is located between the power mirror switches L (left) and R (right). Push the switch once and the mirrors will fold in, pushing the switch a second time will return the mirrors to the normal driving position.
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This feature can be activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to "Rear Window Features" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle" for further information.
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors -- If Equipped
An illuminated vanity mirror is located on the sun visor. To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the mirror cover upward. The light turns on automatically. Closing the mirror cover turns off the light.
"Slide-On-Rod" And Extender Features Of Sun Visor
To use the "Slide-On-Rod" feature of the sun visor, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the sun visor so it is parallel to the side window, grab the sun visor and pull rearwards until the sun visor is in the desired position. To use the extender feature of the sun visor, grab the extender which is located at the rear of the visor and pull rearward.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
Slide-On-Rod Feature
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) -- IF EQUIPPED The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radarbased sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks, motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the 3 rear/front/side of the vehicle.
Rear Detection Zones
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors to let the driver know that the system is operational. The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand by mode when the vehicle is in PARK.
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.8 m). The zone length starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear bumper of the vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detection zones on both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
· The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the detection zones.
BSM Warning Light
· The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer or other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends
beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire time the vehicle is in a forward gear.
The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road contamination so that the BSM system can function properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
3
Sensor Location (Driver Side Shown)
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume. Refer to "Modes Of Operation" for further information.
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an alert during these types of zone entries.
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either side of the vehicle.
Side Monitoring
Entering From The Rear
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
Overtaking Traffic
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative of less than 15 m.p.h. (24 km/h) and the vehicle remains
speed of less than 30 m.p.h. (48 km/h).
in the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning light will be illuminated. If the difference in
3
speed between the two vehicles is greater than 15 m.p.h.
(24 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.
Rear Monitoring
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Overtaking/Approaching
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage, berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert on such objects. This is normal operation and your vehicle does not require service.
Overtaking/Passing
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in adjacent lanes.
Stationary Objects
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
3 Opposing Traffic
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM system, always check your vehicle's mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
Rear Cross Path
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the drivers when backing out of parking spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 3 mph (5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of approximately 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot situations.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can Modes Of Operation
be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the Uconnect® System. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings/
system will not be able to alert the driver.
Customer Programmable Features" in "Understanding
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
3
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible Blind Spot Alert Lights Only alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM
WARNING!
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object. However, when
RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. It is intended to be the system is operating in Rear Cross Path mode, the
used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a system will respond with both visual and audible alerts
parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible
backing up, even when using RCP. Always check alert is requested, the radio volume is reduced.
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before back- When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
ing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro-
death.
priate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected object are present on the same side at the same time, both the visual and audio alerts will be issued. In addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) volume will be reduced.
NOTE:
· Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM system, the radio volume is reduced.
· If the hazard flashers are on, the system will request the appropriate visual alert only.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio volume is reduced. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the RCP state always requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems.
NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and used.
General Information
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
2. The device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired op-
WARNING! (Continued)
eration of the device.
· Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by other than an authorized service facility could void
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are 3 more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
authorization to use this equipment.
· Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
SEATS
using a seat belt properly.
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the vehicle.
WARNING!
· It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Power Seats
On models equipped with power seats, the switch is located on the outboard side of the seat near the floor. Use this switch to move the driver's seat up or down, forward or rearward or to recline the seatback.
(Continued)
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power Seat Switches 1 -- Seat Control 2 -- Seatback Control -- (If Equipped)
WARNING!
· Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death.
· Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
· Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
CAUTION!
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat's path.
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front or rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release 3 the switch when the desired position is reached.
Reclining The Seatback
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward. rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward,
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch the switch when the desired position is reached.
when the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position is reached.
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
· Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death.
· Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
· Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat's path.
Power Lumbar -- If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats may also be equipped with power lumbar. The power lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat. Push the switch forward or rearward to increase or decrease the lumbar support. Push the switch upward or downward to raise or lower the lumbar support.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
The front driver and passenger heated seats are operated using the Uconnect® System.
WARNING!
· Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin 3
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
Power Lumbar Switch Heated Seats -- If Equipped
On some models, the front and rear seats may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and seatbacks.
· Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Front Heated Seats
The front heated seats control buttons are located within the climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.
You can choose from HI, LO or OFF heat settings. The indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for LO and none for OFF.
· Press the heated seat button once to turn the HI setting ON.
· Press the heated seat button a second time to turn the LO setting ON.
· Press the heated seat button a third time to turn the heating elements OFF.
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will automatically switch to LO-level after approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the display
will change from HI to LO, indicating the change. The LO-level setting will turn OFF automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
NOTE:
· Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within two to five minutes.
· The engine must be running for the heated seats to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated seats can be programed to come on during a remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect® system. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
Rear Heated Seats
NOTE:
On some models, the two outboard seats are equipped · Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within
with heated seats. The heated seat switches for these two to five minutes.
seats are located on the rear of the center console. There are two heated seat switches that allow the rear
· The engine must be running for the heated seats to
3
passengers to operate the seats independently.
operate.
You can choose from HI, LO or OFF heat settings. The indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for LO and none for OFF.
· Push the heated seat button once to select HI-level heating.
When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the normal HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will automatically switch to LO-level after approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two
· Push the heated seat button a second time to select to one, indicating the change. The LO-level setting will
LO-level heating.
turn OFF automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
· Push the heated seat button a third time to turn the heating elements OFF.
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Front Ventilated Seats -- If Equipped
Located in the seat cushion and seat back are small fans that draw the air from the passenger compartment and move air through fine perforations in the seat cover to help keep the driver and front passenger cooler in higher ambient temperatures. The fans operate at two speeds, HI and LO.
The front ventilated seats control buttons are located within the Uconnect® system. You can gain access to the control buttons through the climate screen or the controls screen.
· Press the ventilated seat button once to choose HI.
· Press the ventilated seat button a second time to choose LO.
· Press the ventilated seat button a third time to turn the ventilated seat OFF.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated seats to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the ventilated seats can be programed to come on during a remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect® system. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
Head Restraints
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
WARNING!
The RHRs will automatically return to their normal position following a rear impact. If the RHRs do not
The head restraints for all occupants must be prop- return to their normal position see your authorized
erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu- dealer immediately.
pying a seat. Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head 3 restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment button located at the base of the head restraint and push downward on the head restraint.
NOTE: To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it
NOTE: Do not reverse the head restraints (making the can go then push the release button and the adjustment
rear of the head restraint face forward) in an attempt to button at the base of each post while pulling the head
gain additional clearance to the back of your head.
restraint up. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head
Reactive Head Restraints -- Front Seats
restraint posts into the holes and push downward. Then adjust the head restraint to the appropriate height.
The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with
Reactive Head Restraints (RHR). In the event of a rear
impact the RHRs will automatically extend forward
minimizing the gap between the back of the occupants
head and the RHR.
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Adjustment Button 1 -- Release Button 2 -- Adjustment Button
WARNING!
· A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow removed head restraints in a location outside the occupant compartment.
· ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the re-installation instructions above prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat.
· Do not place items over the top of the Reactive Head Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD players. These items may interfere with the operation of the Reactive Head Restraint in the event of a collision and could result in serious injury or death.
Rear Head Restraints
The center head restraint has two adjustable positions, up or down. When the center seat is being occupied the head restraint should be in the raised position. When there are no occupants in the center seat the head restraint can be lowered for maximum visibility for the driver.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment button located at the base of the head restraint and push downward on the head restraint.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
3
Adjustment Button NOTE:
· The head restraint should only be removed by qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If the center rear head restraints requires removal, see your authorized dealer.
· The outboard head restraints are not adjustable.
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Folding Rear Seat The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an additional storage area. To fold the rear seatback, pull on the loops located on the upper seatback. NOTE: These loops can be tucked away when not in use.
Rear Seatback Loop After releasing the seatback, it can be folded forward.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
WARNING!
· Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position, the seat will not provide the proper sta- 3
bility for child seats and/or passengers. An improp-
erly latched seat could cause serious injury.
· The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
Folded Rear Seatback
be seriously injured in a collision. Children should be seated and using the proper restraint system.
When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
seatback above the seat strap.
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT -- IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows the driver to store up to two different memory profiles for easy recall through a memory switch. Each memory profile contains desired position settings for the driver seat, side mirrors, adjustable pedals (if equipped), and power tilt and telescopic steering column (if equipped) and a set of desired radio station presets. Your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter can also be programmed to recall the same positions when the UNLOCK button is pushed.
The memory seat switch is located on the driver's door trim panel. The switch consists of three buttons: The (S) button, which is used to activate the memory save function and the (1) and (2) buttons which are used to recall either of two pre-programmed memory profiles.
NOTE:
· Only one RKE transmitter can be linked to each of the memory positions.
· Passive Entry door handles cannot be linked to the memory function. Use either the memory recall switch or the RKE transmitter (if linked to the memory feature) to recall memory positions 1 or 2.
Memory Seat Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
Programming The Memory Feature
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
To create a new memory profile, perform the following: Transmitter To Memory
1. Place the ignition into the RUN position.
Your RKE transmitters can be programmed to recall one of two pre-programmed memory profiles by pushing the
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer- UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter.
3
ences (i.e., seat, side mirror, adjustable pedals [if equipped], power tilt and telescopic steering column [if equipped], and radio station presets).
NOTE: Before programming your RKE transmitters you must select the "Memory To FOB" feature through the Uconnect® system screen. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings"
3. Push and release the S (Set) button on the memory in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further
switch.
information.
4. Within five seconds, push and release either of the memory buttons (1) or (2). The Driver Information Display (DID) will display which memory position has been set.
NOTE: Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a memory profile.
To program your RKE transmitters, perform the following:
1. Cycle the vehicles ignition to the Off position.
2. Select desired memory profile (1) or (2). The system will recall any stored settings for this profile. Wait for the system to complete the memory recall before continuing to Step 3.
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If a memory profile has not already been set, refer to Programming The Memory Feature in this section for instructions on how to set a memory profile.
3. Once the profile has been recalled, push and release the SET (S) button on the memory switch, then push and release button (1) or (2) accordingly. "Memory Profile Set" (1 or 2) will display in the instrument cluster.
4. Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter within 10 seconds.
NOTE: Your RKE transmitters can be unlinked to your memory settings by pushing the SET (S) button, and within 10 seconds, followed by pushing the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter.
Memory Position Recall
NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in PARK, a message will display in the DID (if equipped).
To recall the memory settings for driver one, push MEMORY button number (1) on the driver's door or the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 1.
To recall the memory setting for driver two, push MEMORY button number (2) on the driver's door or the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 2.
A recall can be cancelled by pushing any of the MEMORY buttons (S, 1, or 2) on the driver's door during a recall. When a recall is cancelled, the driver seat, adjustable pedals (if equipped), and power tilt and telescopic steering column (if equipped) stop moving. A delay of one second will occur before another recall can be selected.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
Easy Entry/Exit Seat
· The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle.
driver seat position is less than 0.9 in (22.7 mm)
forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no
benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit
or Easy Entry.
3
The distance the driver seat moves depends on where
you have the driver seat positioned when you cycle the Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
vehicles ignition to the OFF position.
Entry and Easy Exit position.
· When you cycle the vehicles ignition to the OFF position, the driver seat will move about 2.4 in (60 mm) rearward if the driver seat position is greater than or equal to 2.7 in (67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. The seat will return to its previously set position when you cycle the vehicles ignition to the ACC or RUN position.
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy Entry/Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through the programmable features in the Uconnect® system. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings/Customer Programmable Features" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
Two latches must be released to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side of the instrument panel.
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and push the safety catch to the left. The safety catch is located under the center front edge of the hood.
Hood Release Lever
Hood Safety Latch
Use the hood prop rod (if equipped) to secure the hood in the open position.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to close it. Lower the hood until it is open approximately 6 inches (15 cm), and then drop it. This should secure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of 3 the instrument panel. This switch controls the operation of the headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights, instrument panel light dimming, interior lights and fog lights.
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Headlights -- If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on, rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the AUTO position. When the system is on, the headlight time delay feature is also on. This means the headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the ignition into the OFF position. To turn the automatic system off, move the headlight switch out of the AUTO position.
Headlight Switch
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent for parking light and instrument panel light operation. Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for headlight, parking light and instrument panel light operation.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights will come on in the automatic mode.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in the OFF
Automatic Headlights Only)
position while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on the headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is begins when the headlight switch is turned off. placed in the AUTO position and programmable feature If you turn the headlights or parking lights on, or place 3
is set to ON. In addition, the headlights will turn off the ignition in ACC or RUN, the system will cancel the
when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by delay.
this feature.
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will
NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turn off in the normal manner.
turned on or off using the Uconnect® System. Refer to NOTE: "Uconnect® Settings/Customer Programmable Features" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for · The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of
further information.
placing the ignition in the OFF position to activate this
Headlight Time Delay
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination for up to 90 seconds (programmable) when leaving your vehicle in an unlit area.
feature.
· The headlight delay time is programmable using the Uconnect® System, refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control -- If Equipped
and other obstructions on the windshield or camera lens will cause the system to function improperly.
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system provides increased forward lighting at night by automating high beam control through the use of a digital camera mounted on the windshield. This camera detects vehicle specific light and automatically switches from high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view.
NOTE:
· The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be turned on or off using the Uconnect® System. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must be re-aimed to ensure proper performance. See your local authorized dealer.
To Activate
1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO headlight position.
2. Push the multifunction lever away from you (toward front of vehicle) to engage the high beam mode.
NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is at or above 15 mph (24 km/h).
· Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
To Deactivate
· The Adaptive Headlight System is active only when
1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you (or rearward the vehicle is moving forward.
in car) to manually deactivate the system (normal The Adaptive Headlight System can be turned On or Off
operation of low beams).
using the Uconnect® System, refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for 3
2. Push back on the multifunction lever to reactivate the further information.
system.
Adaptive Bi-Xenon High Intensity Discharge
Daytime Running Lights (DRL)
Headlights -- If Equipped
The LED Daytime Running Lights will come on when the
engine starts, headlights are off, and the parking brake is This system automatically swivels the headlight beam off. The headlight switch must be used for normal pattern horizontally to provide increased illumination in nighttime driving. the direction the vehicle is steering.
NOTE:
NOTE: If allowed by law in the country in which the vehicle was purchased the Daytime Running Lights can
· Each time the Adaptive Headlight System is turned on, be turned on and off using the Uconnect® System, refer
the headlights will initialize by performing a brief to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instru-
sequence of rotations.
ment Panel" for further information.
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition is placed in the OFF position, a chime will sound to alert the driver when the driver's door is opened.
Fog Lights -- If Equipped
Front Fog Lights -- If Equipped The front fog light switch is built into the headlight switch.
Fog Light Switch To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking lights or the low beam headlights and push the headlight switch. To turn off the front fog lights, either push the headlight switch a second time or turn off the headlight switch.
NOTE: The fog lights will operate with the low beam headlights or parking lights on. However, selecting the high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn signals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
3
Multifunction Lever
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Turn Signals
Lane Change Assist
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights. three times then automatically turn off.
NOTE:
High/Low Beam Switch
· If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective.
· A "Turn Signal On" message will appear in the Driver Information Display (DID) and a continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This will turn on the high beams headlights until the lever is released.
Front Map/Reading Lights -- If Equipped
The front map/reading lights are mounted in the overhead console.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
second time. The lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) is pushed.
3
Front Map/Reading Lights
Each light can be turned on by pushing a switch on either side of the console. These buttons are backlit for night time visibility. To turn the lights off, push the switch a
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Courtesy Lights
Ambient Light -- If Equipped
The courtesy lights can be turned on by pushing the top The overhead console is equipped with an ambient light
corner of the lens. To turn the lights off, push the lens a feature. This light casts illumination for improved visibil-
second time.
ity of the floor and center console area.
Courtesy Lights
Ambient Light
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
Interior Lights
Dimmer Controls
The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
The dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and is
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off located on the left side of the instrument panel.
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is moved to
3
the LOCK position. This will occur if the interior lights
were switched on manually or are on because a door is
open. This includes the glove box light and the trunk
light. To restore interior light operation, either place the
ignition in the ON/RUN position or cycle the light
switch.
Dimmer Controls
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the left dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights and lighted cupholders (if equipped).
Ambient Light Control
Rotate the right dimmer control upward or downward to increase or decrease the brightness of the door handle lights and ambient light located in the overhead console.
Instrument Panel Dimmer
Door Handle/Ambient Light Dimmer
Dome Light Position
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
Rotate the left dimmer control completely upward to the The multifunction lever operates the windshield wipers
second detent to turn on the interior lights. The interior and washer when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this or ACC position. The multifunction lever is located on
position.
the left side of the steering column.
3
Interior Light Defeat (OFF)
Rotate the left dimmer control to the extreme bottom "OFF" position. The interior lights will remain off when the doors are open.
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control upward to the first detent. This feature brightens all text displays such as the odometer, Driver Information Display (DID), and radio when the position lights or headlights are on.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Control
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent position, and then turn the end of the lever to select the desired delay interval. There are four delay settings, which allow you to regulate the wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second to a maximum of approximately 36 seconds between cycles. The delay intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent, past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper operation, or to the second detent past the intermittent settings for high-speed wiper operation.
CAUTION!
· Turn the windshield wipers off when driving through an automatic car wash. Damage to the windshield wipers may result if the wiper control is left in any position other than off.
· In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch and allow the wipers to return to the "Park" position before turning off the engine. If the wiper switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the windshield, damage to the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted.
· Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the off position. If the windshield wiper control is turned off and the blades cannot return to the off position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
Mist Feature
If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper
Rotate the end of the lever downward to the Mist control is in the delay range, the wipers will operate for position to activate a single wipe cycle to clear off road two wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume mist or spray from a passing vehicle. The wipers will the intermittent interval previously selected. continue to operate until you release the multifunction If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is 3
lever.
turned off, the wipers will operate for three wipe cycles
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer and then turn off.
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
WARNING!
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, push the multifunction lever inward (toward the steering column) and hold it for as long as washer spray is desired.
could lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather, warm the windshield with the defroster before and during windshield washer use.
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With Automatic Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position and programmable feature is set to ON. In addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turned on or off using the Uconnect® System. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings/Customer Programmable Features" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
Rain Sensing Wipers
from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings to activate this feature.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the least sensitive, and wiper delay position 4 is the most sensitive. Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions. Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less wiper sensitivity. Setting 4 can be used if the driver desires more sensitivity. The rain sense wipers will automatically change between an intermittent wipe, slow wipe and a fast wipe depending on the amount of moisture that is sensed on the windshield. Place the wiper switch in the OFF position when not using the system.
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The feature is especially useful for road splash or over spray
The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off using the Uconnect® System, refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
NOTE:
vehicle speed becomes greater than 0 mph (0 km/h) or
· The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the the outside temperature rises above freezing.
wiper speed is in the low or high position.
· Neutral Wipe Inhibit -- The Rain Sensing feature will
· The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly when ice or dried salt water is present on the windshield.
not operate when the ignition is placed in the RUN position, the automatic transmission gear selector is in
3
the NEUTRAL position and the vehicle speed is less
than 3 mph (5 km/h), unless the wiper control on the
· Use of Rain-X® or products containing wax or silicone multifunction lever is moved or the gear selector is
may reduce rain sensor performance.
moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
The Rain Sensing system has protective features for the wiper blades and arms. It will not operate under the following conditions:
· Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit -- The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the ignition is placed in the RUN position, the vehicle is stationary and the outside temperature is below 32°F (0°C), unless the wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved, the
· Remote Start Mode Inhibit -- On vehicles equipped with Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has placed the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position, rain sensing wiper operation can resume, if it has been selected, and no other inhibit conditions (mentioned previously) exist.
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering column.
To unlock the steering column, pull the lever downward. To tilt the steering column, move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering column in position, push the lever upward until fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving. Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death.
Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle
POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN -- IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column. The power tilt/telescoping steering column switch is located below the multifunction lever on the steering column.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
3
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Switch
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To tilt the steering column, move the switch up or down as desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the switch toward you or push the switch away from you as desired.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat, you can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or the memory switch on the driver's door trim panel to return the tilt/telescopic steering column to preprogrammed positions. Refer to "Driver Memory Seat" in this section.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving. Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL -- IF EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated steering wheel has been turned on it can operate for up to 130 minutes before automatically shutting off. The heated steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is located within the Uconnect® system. You can gain access to the control button through the climate screen or the controls screen.
· Press the heated steering wheel button turn the heating element ON.
once to
· Press the heated steering wheel button a second time to turn the heating element OFF.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated steering wheel to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
WARNING! (Continued)
used for long periods. · Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on during a remote start through the Uconnect® system.
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering 3 wheel covers of any type and material. This may cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
Refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your
Instrument Panel" for further information.
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS -- IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
· Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exercise care when using the steering wheel heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if
The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and seat position. This feature allows the brake and accelerator pedals to move toward or away from the driver to provide improved position with the steering wheel.
The switch is located on the front side of the driver's seat cushion side shield.
(Continued)
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
· The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the Electronic Speed Control System is on. The following messages will be displayed on vehicles equipped with the Driver Information Display (DID) if the pedals are attempted to be adjusted when the system is locked out ("Adjustable Pedal Disabled -- Cruise Control Engaged" or "Adjustable Pedal Disabled -- Vehicle In Reverse").
NOTE:
Adjustable Pedals Switch Push the switch forward to move the pedals forward (toward the front of the vehicle).
Push the switch rearward to move the pedals rearward (toward the driver). · The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF.
· Always adjust the pedals to a position that allows full pedal travel.
· Further small adjustments may be necessary to find the best possible seat/pedal position.
· For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat, you can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or the memory switch on the driver's door trim panel to return the adjustable pedals to pre-programmed
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
positions. Refer to "Driver Memory Seat" in "Under- ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL -- IF EQUIPPED
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle" for further When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
information.
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
CAUTION!
3
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals right side of the steering wheel. or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage
to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become lim-
ited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the
adjustable pedal's path.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving. You could lose control and have an accident. Always adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked.
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Electronic Speed Control Buttons
1 -- ON/OFF 2 -- SET+/ACCEL 3 -- RESUME
4 -- SET-/DECEL 5 -- CANCEL
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button to activate the electronic speed control. CRUISE CONTROL READY will appear on the instrument cluster to indicate the electronic speed control is on. To turn the system off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. CRUISE CONTROL OFF will appear on the instrument cluster to indicate the electronic speed control is off. The system should be turned off when not in use.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
WARNING!
To Deactivate
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose control and have an accident. Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control with-
out erasing the set speed from memory.
3
Pushing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed from memory.
To Set A Desired Speed
To Resume Speed
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, push the SET (+) or SET (-) button and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed. Once a speed has
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+) button and release. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
been set a message CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH To Vary The Speed Setting
(km/h) will appear indicating what speed was set. A CRUISE indicator lamp, along with set speed will also appear and stay on in the instrument cluster when the speed is set.
To Increase Speed
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing the SET + button.
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for more information. The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
· Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph.
· If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
· Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
· If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established.
To Decrease Speed
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can decrease speed by pushing the SET - button.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for more information. The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
· Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
· If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal.
Metric Speed (km/h)
· Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control.
3
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
· If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Push the accelerator as you would normally. When the Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed. that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed.
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) -- IF EQUIPPED
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving convenience provided by cruise control while traveling on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a safety system and not designed to prevent collisions. Electronic Speed Control function performs differently. Please refer to the proper section within this chapter.
ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant need to reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar sensor and a forward facing camera designed to detect a vehicle directly ahead of you.
NOTE:
· If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you, ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.
· If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will apply limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed the original set speed) automatically to maintain a preset following distance, while matching the speed of the vehicle ahead.
The Cruise Control system has two control modes:
· Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an appropriate distance between vehicles.
· Normal (fixed speed) electronic speed control mode for cruising at a constant preset speed. For additional information, refer to "Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode" in this section.
NOTE: Normal (fixed speed) electronic speed control will not react to preceding vehicles. Always be aware of the mode selected.
You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control buttons. The two control modes function differently. Always confirm which mode is selected.
WARNING!
· Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience system. It is not a substitute for active driving involvement. It is always the driver's responsibility to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead; and, most importantly, brake operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road conditions. Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
WARNING! (Continued)
· The ACC system: · Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a 3 traffic jam or a disabled vehicle). · Cannot take street, traffic, and weather conditions into account, and may be limited upon adverse sight distance conditions. · Does not always fully recognize complex driving conditions, which can result in wrong or missing distance warnings. · Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop while following a target vehicle and hold the vehicle for 2 seconds in the stop position. If the target vehicle does not start moving within two seconds the ACC system will display a message that the system will release the brakes and that the
(Continued)
(Continued)
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
brakes must be applied manually. An audible chime will sound when the brakes are released. You should switch off the ACC system: · When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet, heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e., in highway construction zones). · When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp; when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snowcovered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill slopes. · When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes. · When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a constant speed.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The speed control buttons (located on the right side of the steering wheel) operates the ACC system.
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
1 -- NORMAL (FIXED SPEED) CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF 2 -- SET+/ACCEL 3 -- RESUME 4 -- SET-/DECEL 5 -- DISTANCE SETTING -- INCREASE 6 -- ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF 7 -- DISTANCE SETTING -- DECREASE 8 -- CANCEL
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
NOTE: Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications · When the parking brake is set.
to the vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning System.
· When the automatic transmission is in PARK, REVERSE or NEUTRAL.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
· When the Vehicle speed is outside of the speed range. 3
You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speed is above 0 mph (0 km/h).
· When the brakes are overheated.
The minimum Set Speed for the ACC system is 20 mph · When the driver door is open.
(32 km/h).
· When the driver seat belt is unbuckled.
When the system is turned on and in the READY state, the Driver Information Display (DID) displays "ACC Ready."
When the system is OFF, the DID displays "Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off."
NOTE: You cannot engage ACC under the following conditions:
· ESC Full-Off Mode is active.
To Activate/Deactivate
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF button. The ACC menu in the DID displays "ACC Ready."
· When you apply the brakes.
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
To turn the system OFF, push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF button again. At this time, the system will turn off and the DID will display "Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off."
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
WARNING! (Continued)
want. You could lose control and have a collision. Always leave the system off when you are not using it.
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do not, the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set speed. If this occurs:
· The message "DRIVER OVERRIDE" will display in the DID.
3
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
· The system will not be controlling the distance be-
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the tween your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle
SET + button or the SET - button and release. The DID speed will only be determined by the position of the
will display the set speed.
accelerator pedal.
If the system is Set when the vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be defaulted to 20 mph (32 km/h). If the system is Set when the vehicle speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be the current speed of the vehicle.
NOTE: ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary vehicle in front of your vehicle in close proximity.
To Cancel The following conditions cancel the system: · The brake pedal is applied. · The CANCEL button is pushed. · An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
· The shift lever/gear selector is removed from the Drive position.
· The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control System (ESC/TCS) activates.
· The vehicle parking brake is applied.
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in memory if:
· The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control ON/OFF button is pushed.
· Driver seatbelt is unbuckled at low speeds.
· The ignition is turned off.
· Driver door is opened at low speeds.
NOTE:
· If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer than two seconds, then the system will cancel and the brake force will be ramped-out. The driver will have to apply the brakes to keep the vehicle at a standstill.
· The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off button is pushed.
To Resume
If there is a set speed in memory push the RES (resume) button and then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The DID will display the last set speed.
· ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle in-front of your vehicle in close proximity.
NOTE:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
To Vary The Speed Setting
· If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer than two To Increase Speed
seconds, then the system will cancel and the brake While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by
force will be ramped-out. The driver will have to apply pushing the SET + button. the brakes to keep the vehicle at a standstill.
3
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
· ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to "Under-
in-front of your vehicle in close proximity.
standing Your Instrument Panel" for more information.
WARNING!
The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
The Resume function should only be used if traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury.
U.S. Speed (mph)
· Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph.
· If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected in the DID.
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Metric Speed (km/h)
· Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
· If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected in the DID.
To Decrease Speed
While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by pushing the SET - button.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for more information.
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
· Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
· If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the DID.
Metric Speed (km/h)
· Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
· If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will · The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up
continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the hill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on
button is released. The decrease in set speed is re- moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting
flected in the DID.
may occur while climbing uphill or descending down-
NOTE: · When you override and push the SET + button or SET
hill. This is normal operation and necessary to main- 3 tain set speed. When driving up hill and down hill, the ACC system will cancel if the braking temperature
- buttons, the new Set Speed will be the current speed exceeds normal range (overheated).
of the vehicle.
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
· When you use the SET - button to decelerate, if the engine's braking power does not slow the vehicle sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system will automatically slow the vehicle.
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by varying the distance setting between four bars (longest), three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short). Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC
· The ACC system decelerates the vehicle to a full stop calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This
when following a target vehicle. If an ACC host vehicle distance setting displays in the DID.
follows a target vehicle to a standstill, after two seconds
the driver will either have to push the RES (resume)
button, or apply the accelerator pedal to reengage the
ACC to the existing Set Speed.
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Distance Setting 4 Bars (Longest)
Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
3
Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium)
Distance Setting 1 Bar (Short) To increase the distance setting, push the Distance Setting -- Increase button and release. Each time the button is pushed, the distance setting increases by one bar (longer).
To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance Setting -- Decrease button and release. Each time the button is pushed, the distance setting decreases by one bar (shorter).
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the same lane, the DID displays the "Sensed Vehicle Indicator" icon, and the system adjusts vehicle speed automatically to maintain the distance setting, regardless of the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
· The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set speed.
· The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of the sensor.
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; however, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if necessary.
NOTE: The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert "BRAKE" will flash in the DID and a chime will sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking capacity.
· The distance setting is changed.
· The system disengages. (Refer to the information on ACC Activation).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
Overtake Aid
When driving with ACC engaged and following a vehicle, the system will provide an additional acceleration up to the ACC set speed to assist in passing the vehicle. This additional acceleration is triggered when the driver 3 utilizes the left turn signal and will only be active when passing on the left hand side.
ACC Operation At Stop
Brake Alert
NOTE: The "Brake!" Screen in the DID is a warning for the driver to take action and does not necessarily mean that the Forward Collision Warning system is applying the brakes autonomously.
If the ACC system brings your vehicle to a standstill while following a target vehicle, if the target vehicle starts moving within two seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, your vehicle will resume motion without the need for any driver action.
If the target vehicle does not start moving within two seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, the ACC with Stop system will cancel and the brakes will release.
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
A cancel message will display on the DID and produce a warning chime. Driver intervention will be required at this moment.
While ACC with Stop is holding your vehicle at a standstill, if the driver seatbelt is unbuckled or the driver door is opened, the ACC with Stop system will cancel and the brakes will release. A cancel message will display on the DID and produce a warning chime. Driver intervention will be required at this moment.
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or objects in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The DID displays the current ACC system settings. The DID is located in the center of the instrument cluster. The information it displays depends on ACC system status.
Push the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/ OFF button (located on the steering wheel) until one of the following displays in the DID:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read "Adaptive Cruise Control Off."
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has not been selected, the display will read "Adaptive Cruise Control Ready."
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
Push the SET + or the SET- button (located on the steering Display Warnings And Maintenance
wheel) and the following will display in the DID:
"Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle"
ACC SET
Warning
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the The "ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor" 3
instrument cluster.
warning will display and also a chime will indicate when
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC conditions temporarily limit system performance.
activity occurs, which may include any of the following: This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as
· System Cancel · Driver Override
in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these cases, the DID will display "ACC/
· System Off · ACC Proximity Warning · ACC Unavailable Warning
FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor" and the system will deactivate.
The "ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor" message can sometimes be displayed while driving in
· The DID will return to the last display selected after highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or
five seconds of no ACC display activity
ice and snow). The ACC system will recover after the
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may temporarily occur.
· Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and require a sensor realignment.
NOTE: If the "ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor" warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is still available. For additional information refer to "Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode" in this section.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the vehicle behind the lower grille.
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is important to note the following maintenance items:
· If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due to a collision, see your authorized dealer for service.
· Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor, including transparent material or aftermarket grilles. Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or malfunction.
When the condition that deactivated the system is no longer present, the system will return to the "Adaptive Cruise Control Off" state and will resume function by simply reactivating it.
· Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage the sensor lens.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
NOTE:
obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or ice on windshield and
· If the "ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor" message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at
fog on the inside of glass. In these cases, the DID will display "ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield" and the system will have degraded performance.
3
your authorized dealer.
The "ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
· Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is not recommended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit ACC/FCW operation.
Windshield" message can sometimes be displayed while driving in adverse weather conditions. The ACC/FCW system will recover after the vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when the camera is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may
"Clean Front Windshield" Warning
temporarily occur.
The "ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield" warning will display and also a chime will indicate when conditions temporarily limit system performance. This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC system may also become temporarily blinded due to
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should examine the windshield and the camera located on the back side of the inside rear view mirror. They may require cleaning or removal of an obstruction.
192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the condition that created limited functionality is no longer present, the system will return to full functionality.
NOTE: If the "ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield" message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction, have the windshield and forward facing camera inspected at your authorized dealer.
Service ACC/FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the DID displays "ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required" or "Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required", there may be an internal system fault or a temporary malfunction that limits ACC functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, ACC will be temporarily unavailable. If this occurs, try activating ACC again later, following an ignition cycle. If the problem persists, see your authorized dealer.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need to intervene.
Towing A Trailer
Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC.
Offset Driving
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and out of the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
the vehicle is out of the curve the system will resume your original Set Speed. This is a part of normal ACC system functionality.
NOTE: On tight turns ACC performance may be limited. 3
Offset Driving Condition Example Turns And Bends
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system may decrease the vehicle speed and acceleration for stability reasons, with no target vehicle detected. Once
Turn Or Bend Example
194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Using ACC On Hills
Lane Changing
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC performance may be limited.
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown, ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and it may not detect the vehicle until it's too late for the ACC system to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
ACC Hill Example
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195
Narrow Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of
the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they
have moved fully into the lane. There may not be
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
3
Lane Changing Example
Narrow Vehicle Example
196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
General Information
ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
2. The device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment.
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197
Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control Mode
WARNING!
In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a Normal In the normal Cruise Control mode, the system will (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control mode is available not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity for cruising at fixed speeds. The Normal (Fixed Speed) warning does not activate and no alarm will sound 3 Electronic Speed Control mode is designed to maintain a even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since set cruising speed without requiring the driver to operate neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the the accelerator. Electronic Speed Control can only be vehicle-to vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to operated if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h). maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is To change between the different control modes, push the selected. ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF button
which turns the ACC and the NORMAL (Fixed Speed) To Set A Desired Speed
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL OFF. Pushing of the
NORMAL (Fixed Speed) ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL ON/OFF button will result in turning ON (changing to) the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control mode.
Turn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, push the SET (+) or SET (-) button and release. Release the accel-
erator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Once a speed has been set a message (CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH/KM) will appear indicating what speed was set. This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is SET.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
The speed increment shown is dependant on the speed of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
· Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph.
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing the SET + button.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for more information.
· If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected in the DID display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
· Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199
· If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected in the DID display.
· If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the DID display.
To Decrease Speed
Metric Speed (km/h)
3
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set, you can decrease speed by pushing the SET - button.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for more information. The speed decrement shown is dependant on the speed of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
· Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
· If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the DID display.
U.S. Speed (mph)
To Cancel
· Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
The following conditions will cancel the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control without clearing the memory:
· The brake pedal is applied.
200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
· The CANCEL button is pushed. · The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys-
tem (ESC/TCS) activates. · The vehicle parking brake is applied. · The braking temperature exceeds normal range (over-
heated). · The shift lever/gear selector is removed from the
Drive position.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button and release. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in memory if: · The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
ON/OFF button is pushed.
· The ignition is turned off.
· The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off button is pushed.
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) WITH MITIGATION -- IF EQUIPPED
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation Operation
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system with mitigation provides the driver with audible warnings, visual warnings (within the DID), and may apply a brake jerk to warn the driver when it detects a potential frontal collision. The warnings and limited braking are intended to provide the driver with enough time to react, avoid or mitigate the potential collision.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201
NOTE: FCW monitors the information from the forward event stops the vehicle completely, the system will hold
looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller the vehicle at standstill for two seconds and then release
(EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision. the brakes.
When the system determines that a forward collision is
probable, the driver will be provided with audible and
3
visual warnings and may provide a brake jerk warning. If
the driver does not take action based upon these progres-
sive warnings, then the system will provide a limited
level of active braking to help slow the vehicle and
mitigate the potential forward collision. If the driver
reacts to the warnings by braking and the system deter-
mines that the driver intends to avoid the collision by
braking but has not applied sufficient brake force, the
system will compensate and provide additional brake
force as required. If a Forward Collision Warning with
Mitigation event begins at a speed below 20 mph
(32 km/h), the system may provide the maximum or
FCW Message
partial braking to mitigate the potential forward colli-
sion. If the Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation
202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the system determines a collision with the vehicle in front of you is no longer probable, the warning message will be deactivated.
NOTE:
· The minimum speed for FCW activation is 1 mph (2 km/h).
· The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts based on the course prediction. This is expected and is a part of normal FCW activation and functionality.
· It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such misuse of the system, after four Active Braking events within an ignition cycle, the Active Braking portion of FCW will be deactivated until the next ignition cycle.
be deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the surroundings.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect every type of potential collision. The driver has the responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow this warning could lead to serious injury or death.
Turning FCW ON Or OFF
NOTE: The default status of FCW is "On", this allows the system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you.
· The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If The forward collision button is located on the switch the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should panel below the Uconnect® display.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203
To turn the FCW system OFF, push the forward collision Changing FCW And Active Braking Status
button once to turn the system OFF (led turns on).
The FCW Sensitivity And Active Braking Settings are
To turn the FCW system back ON, push the forward programmable through the Uconnect® System. Refer to
collision button again to turn the system ON (led turns "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instru-
off).
ment Panel" for further information.
3
Changing the FCW status to "Off" prevents the system from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you.
Changing the Active Braking status to "Off" prevents the system from providing limited autonomous braking, or additional brake support if the driver is not braking adequately in the event of a potential frontal collision.
NOTE: The FCW system state is kept in memory from one ignition cycle to the next. If the system is turned OFF, it will remain off when the vehicle is restarted.
The default status of FCW is the "Far" setting and the Active Braking is the "On" setting, this allows the system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther away and it applies limited braking. This gives you the most reaction time to avoid a possible collision.
Changing the FCW status to the "Near" setting, allows the system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are much closer. This setting provides less reaction time than the "Far" setting, which allows for a more dynamic driving experience.
204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
· The system will retain the last setting selected by the driver after ignition shut down.
· FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as overhead objects, ground reflections, objects not in the path of the car, stationary objects that are far away, oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or higher rate of speed.
· FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable screens.
FCW Limited Warning
If the DID displays "ACC/FCW Limited Functionality" or "ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield" momentarily, there may be a condition that limits FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, the active braking may not be
fully available. Once the condition that limited the system performance is no longer present, the system will return to its full performance state. If the problem persists, see your authorized dealer.
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the DID displays: · ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required · Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
LANESENSE -- IF EQUIPPED
LaneSense Operation
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds above 37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h). The
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205
LaneSense system uses a forward looking camera to remain within the lane. When only a single lane marking
detect lane markings and measure vehicle position is detected, a haptic (torque) warning will not be pro-
within the lane boundaries.
vided.
When both lane markings are detected and the driver unintentionally drifts out of the lane (no turn signal
NOTE: When operating conditions have been met, the LaneSense system will monitor if the driver's hands are
3
applied), the LaneSense system provides a haptic warn- on the steering wheel and provides an audible warning
ing in the form of torque applied to the steering wheel to to the driver when the driver's hands are not detected on
prompt the driver to remain within the lane boundaries. the steering wheel. The system will cancel if the driver
If the driver continues to unintentionally drift out of the does not return their hands to the wheel.
lane, the LaneSense system provides a visual warning through the Driver Information Display (DID) to prompt
Turning LaneSense ON Or OFF
the driver to remain within the lane boundaries.
The default status of LaneSense is "OFF".
The driver may manually override the haptic warning by The LaneSense button is located on the center stack
applying torque into the steering wheel at any time.
below the Uconnect® display.
When only a single lane marking is detected and the driver unintentionally drifts across the lane marking (no turn signal applied), the LaneSense system provides a visual warning through the DID to prompt the driver to
To turn the LaneSense system ON, push the LaneSense button to turn the system ON (LED turns off). A "Lane Sense On" message is shown in the DID.
206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To turn the LaneSense system OFF, push the LaneSense button once to turn the system OFF (LED turns on).
NOTE: The LaneSense system will retain the last system state ON or OFF from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position.
LaneSense Warning Message
The LaneSense system will indicate the current lane drift condition through the Driver Information Display (DID).
7.0 Driver Information Display (DID) Screen -- If Equipped
When the LaneSense system is ON; the lane lines are gray when both of the lane boundaries have not been detected and the LaneSense indicator is solid white.
System ON (Gray Lines/White Indicator)
Left Lane Departure -- Only Left Lane Detected
· When the LaneSense system is ON, the LaneSense indicator is solid white when only the left lane marking has been detected and the system is ready to provide visual warnings in the DID if an unintentional lane departure occurs.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207
· When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the behavior for a right lane departure when only the right
left thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off), the left thin lane marking has been detected.
line remains solid yellow and the LaneSense indicator Left Lane Departure -- Both Lanes Detected
changes from solid white to flashing yellow.
3
· When the LaneSense system is ON, the lane lines turn
from gray to white to indicate that both of the lane
markings have been detected. The LaneSense indicator
is solid green when both lane markings have been
detected and the system is "armed" to provide visual
warnings in the DID and a torque warning in the
steering wheel if an unintentional lane departure oc-
curs.
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Indicator)
208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
· For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lanes Sensed (White Lines/Green Indicator) · When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situa-
tion, the left thick lane line and left thin line turn solid yellow. The LaneSense indicator changes from solid green to solid yellow. At this time torque is applied to the steering wheel in the opposite direction of the lane boundary.
Lane Sensed (Solid Yellow Thick Line, Solid Yellow Thin Line/Solid Yellow Indicator)
· When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been approached and is in a lane departure situation, the left thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off) and the left
thin line remains solid yellow. The LaneSense indicator changes from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At this time torque is applied to the steering wheel in the opposite direction of the lane boundary.
· For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the steering wheel will turn to the right.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209
3
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Indicator)
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar behavior for a right lane departure.
210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Changing LaneSense Status
· Use of the turn signal suppresses the warnings.
The LaneSense system settings can be configured through the Uconnect® system screen.
Follow these steps to change the LaneSense settings:
1. Push the "Controls" button on touchscreen located on the bottom of the Uconnect® display.
2. Push the "Settings" button.
3. Push the "Safety & Driving Assistance" button.
When in the Safety & Driving Assistance screen, you can configure the intensity of the torque warning and the warning zone sensitivity (early/late) through the personalization settings.
· The system will not apply torque to the steering wheel whenever a safety system engages. (anti-lock brakes, traction control system, electronic stability control, forward collision warning, etc.)
PARKSENSE® FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST -- IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense® Park Assist system provides visual and audible indications of the distance between the rear and/or front fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up or moving forward, e.g. during a parking maneuver. Refer to ParkSense® System Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and recommendations.
NOTE:
ParkSense® will retain the last system state (enabled or
· When enabled the system operates above 37 mph
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position.
(60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211
ParkSense® can be active only when the gear selector is The six ParkSense® sensors, located in the front fascia/
in REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense® is enabled at one bumper, monitor the area in front of the vehicle that is
of these gear selector positions, the system will remain within the sensors' field of view. The sensors can detect
active until the vehicle speed is increased to approxi- obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 47 in
mately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. The system will (120 cm) from the front fascia/bumper in the horizontal 3
become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to direction, depending on the location, type and orienta-
speeds less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
tion of the obstacle.
ParkSense® Sensors
ParkSense® Warning Display
The four ParkSense® sensors, located in the rear fascia/ bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors' field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in (200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
The ParkSense® Warning screen will only be displayed if Sound and Display is selected from the Customer Programmable Features section of the Uconnect® System. Refer to Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The ParkSense® Warning screen is located within the Driver Information Display (DID). It provides visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to "Driver Information Display (DID)" for further information.
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the display will show a single solid arc in the center rear region and will produce a one-half second tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the sound tone will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
ParkSense® Display
Rear Park Assist
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the DID will display the park assist ready system status.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle's distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the left and/or right rear region and will produce a fast sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213
3
Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
Slow Tone/Solid Arc
214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Slow Tone/Solid Arc
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215
3 Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc
216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
Rear Distance
(in/cm)
Arcs -- Left
Greater than
79 in (200 cm)
None
Arcs -- Center
Arcs -- Right
Audible Alert
None None None
79-59 in (200-150
cm)
None
6th Solid
None
Single 1/2Second
WARNING ALERTS
59-47 in (150-120
cm)
47-39 in (120-100
cm)
None
None
5th Solid 4th Solid
None
None
Slow (for rear
Slow (for rear
39-25 in
25-12 in
(100-65 cm) (65-30 cm)
Less than 12 in (30
cm)
None
3rd Flashing None
Fast (for rear
2nd Flashing
2nd Flashing
2nd Flashing
Fast
1st Flashing 1st Flashing 1st Flashing Continuous
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217
Rear Distance
(in/cm)
Chime
Greater than
79 in (200 cm)
Radio Vol-
No
ume Re-
duced
79-59 in (200-150
cm)
Tone (for rear center
only) Yes
WARNING ALERTS
59-47 in (150-120
cm)
47-39 in
39-25 in
25-12 in Less than
(120-100 (100-65 cm) (65-30 cm) 12 in (30
cm)
cm)
3
center only)
center only)
center only)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
NOTE: ParkSense® will reduce the volume of the radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Front Park Assist
the display will show the single arc moving closer to the
When the vehicle is in DRIVE the ParkSense® Warning vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.
screen will be displayed when an obstacle is detected.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle's distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center front region, the display will show a single arc in the center front region. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle. A fast sound tone will be produced when reaching the 2nd flashing arc and will change to a continuous sound tone when the 1st flashing arc appears.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right front region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the left and/or right front region and will produce a fast sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle,
No Tone/Solid Arc
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219
3 Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc
220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
Front Distance (in/cm)
Arcs -- Left Arcs -- Center Arcs -- Right Audible Alert
Chime Radio Volume
Reduced
Greater than 47 in (120 cm)
None None None None
No
WARNING ALERTS
47-39 in (120-100 cm)
39-25 in (100-65 cm)
None
None
4th Solid
3rd Flashing
None
None
None
None
No
No
NOTE: ParkSense® will reduce the volume of the radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
25-12 in (65-30 cm) 2nd Flashing 2nd Flashing 2nd Flashing
Fast
Yes
Less than 12 in (30 cm) 1st Flashing 1st Flashing 1st Flashing Continuous
Yes
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense®
ParkSense® will turn off the Front Park Assist audible ParkSense® can be enabled and disabled with the
alert (chime) after approximately three seconds when an ParkSense® switch, located on the switch panel below
obstacle has been detected, the vehicle is stationary, and the Uconnect® display.
brake pedal is applied.
3 When the ParkSense® switch is pushed to dis-
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
able the system, the instrument cluster will dis-
Front and Rear chime volume settings can be selected from the Customer-Programmable Features section of the Uconnect® System, refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
If the Uconnect® System is equipped, chime volume settings will not be accessible from the DID.
The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and
play the "PARKSENSE OFF" message for approximately five seconds. Refer to "Driver Information Display (DID)" for further information. When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled, the DID will display the "PARKSENSE OFF" message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
The ParkSense® switch LED will be ON when ParkSense® is disabled or requires service. The ParkSense® switch LED will be OFF when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense®
HIGH. The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM. switch is pushed, and requires service, the ParkSense®
ParkSense® will retain its last known configuration state switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED will
through ignition cycles.
be ON.
222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Service The ParkSense® Park Assist System
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense® System has detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will display the PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS, PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS, or the PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED message for five seconds. When the shift lever/gear selector is moved to Reverse and the system has detected a faulted condition, the Driver Information Display (DID) will display a PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS, PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS or PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED pop up message for five seconds. After five seconds, a car graphic will be displayed with UNAVAILABLE at either the front or rear sensor location depending on where the fault is detected. The system will continue to provide arc alerts for the side that is functioning properly. These
arc alerts will interrupt the PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS, PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS, or PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED messages if an object is detected within the five second pop-up duration. The car graphic will remain displayed for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Refer to "Driver Information Display (DID)" for further information.
If PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS or PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS appears in the Driver Information Display (DID) make sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then cycle the ignition. If the message continues to appear see an authorized dealer.
If the PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED message appears in the DID, see an authorized dealer.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223
Cleaning The ParkSense® System
· When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE
Clean the ParkSense® sensors with water, car wash soap position and ParkSense® is turned off, the instrument
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not cluster will display "PARKSENSE OFF" for as long as
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could dam- the vehicle is in REVERSE.
age the sensors.
· ParkSense®, when on, will reduce the volume of the 3
ParkSense® System Usage Precautions
radio when it is sounding a tone.
NOTE:
· Clean the ParkSense® sensors regularly, taking care
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not
· Ensure that the front and rear bumper are free of snow, be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense® Failure to do so can result in the system not working
system operating properly.
properly. The ParkSense® system might not detect an
· Construction equipment, large trucks, and other vibrations could affect the performance of ParkSense®.
· When you turn ParkSense® off, the instrument cluster will display "PARKSENSE OFF." Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense® off, it remains off until you turn it on again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
· Use the ParkSense® switch to turn the ParkSense® system off if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc. are placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the
224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem, causing the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" message to be displayed in the instrument cluster.
CAUTION!
· ParkSense® is only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity.
· The vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkSense® in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when using ParkSense®.
WARNING!
· Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using ParkSense®. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
· Before using ParkSense®, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225
WARNING! (Continued)
could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
NOTE: The ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera has pro-
grammable modes of operation that may be selected
through the Uconnect® System. Refer to "Uconnect®
Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for
further information.
3
PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA -- IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the shift lever/gear selector is put into REVERSE. The ParkView® camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear license plate. The image will be displayed in the touchscreen display along with a caution note to "check entire surroundings" across the top of the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Camera Delay feature and it is turned ON, the rear camera image will be displayed for up to 10 seconds when the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK or the vehicle's ignition is cycled to the OFF position.
When the Vehicle is shifted out of Reverse (with camera delay turned OFF) the rear camera mode is exited and the last touchscreen appears again.
226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected backup path based on the steering wheel position.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate distances for each zone:
Zone Red Yellow Green
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
(Continued)
Distance to the rear of the vehicle 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m) 6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater)
WARNING! (Continued) responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
· To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView® should only be used as a parking aid. The ParkView® camera is unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive path.
· To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkView® to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder when using ParkView®.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights
and storage for sunglasses. Universal Garage Door
Opener (HomeLink®) and power sunroof switches may
also be included, if equipped.
3
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
Overhead Console
228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Front Map/Reading Lights -- If Equipped
Lights are mounted in the overhead console. Each light can be turned on by pushing the switch on either side of the console. These buttons are backlit for night time visibility.
To turn the lights off, push the switch a second time. The lights also turn on when a door is opened. The lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the RKE is pushed.
Front Map/Reading Lights
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
Courtesy Lights
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229
Sunglasses Bin Door
The courtesy lights can be turned on by pushing the top At the front of the console a compartment is provided for
corner of the lens. To turn the lights off, push the lens a the storage of a pair of sunglasses. The storage compart-
second time.
ment access is a "push/push" design. Push the chrome pad on the door to open. Push the chrome pad on the 3
door to close.
Courtesy Lights
Sunglasses Bin Door
230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
GARAGE DOOR OPENER -- IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security systems. The HomeLink® unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt battery.
The HomeLink® buttons, located on either the overhead console, headliner or sunvisor, designate the three different HomeLink® channels. The HomeLink® indicator is located above the center button.
Overhead Console HomeLink® Buttons NOTE: HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink®
NOTE:
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage · Erasing all channels should only be performed when
before you begin programming.
programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not
For more efficient programming and accurate transmis- erase channels when programming additional buttons. 3
sion of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that · If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink® HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
system.
Programming A Rolling Code
To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and push and hold the two outside HomeLink® For programming garage door openers that were manu-
buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red factured after 1995. These garage door openers can be
indicator flashes.
identified by the "LEARN" or "TRAIN" button located
where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door
opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to
open and close the door. The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.
232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Training The Garage Door Opener 1 -- Door Opener 2 -- Training Button 1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you want to program while you push and hold the hand-held transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator light. The HomeLink® indicator will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to rapid.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate the "LEARN" or "TRAINING" button. This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener/device motor. Firmly push and release the "LEARN" or "TRAINING" button. On some garage door openers/devices
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233
there may be a light that blinks when the garage door Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
(Rolling Code)
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
step after the LEARN button has been pushed.
follow these steps:
3
6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
HomeLink® button twice (holding the button for two 2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
activates, programming is complete.
not release the button.
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not acti- 3. Without releasing the button proceed with "Program-
vate, push the button a third time (for two seconds) to ming A Rolling Code" step 2 and follow all remaining
complete the training.
steps.
To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons, repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
erase the channels.
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
before 1995.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the Homelink® button you want to program while you push and hold the hand-held transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator light. The Homelink® indicator will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to rapid.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button and observe the indicator light. · If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should activate when the HomeLink® button is pushed.
· To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons, repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button (Non-Rolling Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with "Programming A Non-Rolling Code" step 2 and follow all remaining steps.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink® button,
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States that require the transmitter signals to "time-out" after several seconds of transmission.
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig-
while you push and release ("cycle") your hand-held transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink® has successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when 3 fully trained.
nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out in the same manner.
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage door may open and close while you are programming.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button and observe the indicator light. · If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should activate when the HomeLink® button is pushed. · To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons, repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the channels.
236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button (Canadian/Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with "Canadian/Gate Operator Programming" step 2 and follow all remaining steps.
Using HomeLink®
To operate, push and release the programmed HomeLink® button. Activation will now occur for the programmed device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator, security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.,). The hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time.
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle.
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be erased.
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®, here are some of the most common solutions: · Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmit-
ter.
· Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
· Did you unplug the device for programming and remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237
WARNING!
· Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas 3 can cause serious injury or death.
· Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, pets or other objects are in the path of the door or gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a "stop and reverse" feature as required by Federal safety standards. This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety information or assistance.
238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation.
COMMANDVIEW® SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE -- IF EQUIPPED
The CommandView® sunroof switch is located to the left between the sun visors on the overhead console.
The power shade switch is located to the right between the sun visors on the overhead console.
NOTE:
· The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the device.
· The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
CommandView® Sunroof And Power Shade Switches
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239
WARNING!
· Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-GoTM in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
· In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) · Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any object, to project through the sunroof opening. 3 Injury may result.
Opening Sunroof -- Express
Push the switch rearward and release it within one-half second. The sunroof and sunshade will open automatically from any position. The sunroof and sunshade will open fully and stop automatically. This is called "Express Open". During Express Open operation, any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Opening Sunroof -- Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch rearward to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the
240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and held rearward again.
Closing Sunroof -- Express
Push the switch forward and release it within one-half second and the sunroof will close automatically from any position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically. This is called "Express Close". During Express Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
Opening Power Shade -- Express
Push the shade switch rearward and release it within one-half second and the shade will automatically open to the halfway position and stop automatically. Push the switch a second time from the halfway position and the shade will automatically open to the full open position and stop automatically. This is called "Express Open". During Express Open operation, any movement of the shade switch will stop the shade.
Opening Power Shade -- Manual Mode
Closing Sunroof -- Manual Mode
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch in the forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed condition until the switch is pushed and held forward again.
To open the shade, push and hold the switch rearward. The shade will open and stop automatically at the half-open position. Push and hold the shade switch rearward again and the shade will open automatically to the full-open position. Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the shade will remain in a partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and held rearward again.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241
Closing Power Shade -- Express
Venting Sunroof -- Express
Push the switch forward and release it within one-half Push and release the Vent button within one-half sec-
second and the shade will close automatically from any ond and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This
position. If the sunroof is completely closed the shade is called "Express Vent", and it will occur regardless of will close fully and stop automatically. This is called sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any 3
"Express Close". During Express Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
movement of the switch will stop the shade.
NOTE: If the sunshade is in the closed position when the
NOTE: If the sunroof is open, the shade will close to the vent switch is pushed, the sunshade will automatically
half-open position. Pushing the shade close button again cycle to the halfway open position prior to the sunroof
will automatically close both the sunroof and shade opening to the Vent position.
completely.
Pinch Protect Feature
Closing Power Shade -- Manual Mode
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
To close the shade, push and hold the switch in the the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob-
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
movement and the shade will remain in a partially closed sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruc-
condition until the switch is pushed and held forward tion if this occurs. Next, push the switch forward and
again.
release to Express Close.
242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt will be a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel.
Ignition OFF Operation
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
NOTE: Ignition Off time is programmable through the Uconnect® System. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings/ Customer Programmable Features" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
Your vehicle is equipped with one 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlet on the instrument panel and one 12 Volt (10 Amp) power outlet in the center console that can be used to power cellular phones, small electronics and other low powered electrical accessories. The power outlets are labeled with either a "key" or a "battery" symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered. Power outlets labeled
with a "key" are powered when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position, while the outlets labeled with a "battery" are connected directly to the battery and powered at all times.
NOTE:
· All accessories connected to the "battery" powered outlets should be removed or turned off when the vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against discharge.
· To ensure proper cigar lighter operation, a MOPAR® knob and element must be used.
The front power outlet is located inside the storage area on the center stack of the instrument panel.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243
3
Front Power Outlet
WARNING! Do not place ashes inside the cubby bin located on the center console on vehicles not equipped with the ash receiver tray. A fire leading to bodily injury could result.
244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
In addition to the front power outlet, there is also a power outlet located in the storage area of the center console.
NOTE: If the Media Hub is in use, do not exceed the maximum power of 100 Watts (8 Amps) for the center console power outlet. When the Media Hub is not in use, the outlet can deliver up to 120 Watts (10 Amps). If the power rating is exceeded, the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced.
Center Console Power Outlet
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245
NOTE: The instrument panel power outlet and dual rear console USB ports can be changed to "battery" powered all the time by moving the #12 20 Amp fuse from "IGN" to "B+". Refer to "Rear Power Distribution Center Cover" in "Rear Power Distribution Center (Fuses)". 3
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 -- #12 Fuse 20 Amp Yellow Instrument Panel Power Outlet / Dual USB Charge Only Ports 2 -- #38 Fuse 15 Amp Blue Center Console Power Outlet / Media Hub
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death: · Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet. · Do not touch with wet hands. · Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle. · If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
· Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle's battery even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle's battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
· Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
· After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started (with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to recharge the vehicle's battery.
CAUTION! (Continued) · Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage.
CUPHOLDERS
Front Seat Cupholders
The cupholders are located in the forward edge of the center console.
(Continued)
Retractable Cover
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247
3 Front Cupholders
248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Heated And Cooled Cupholders -- If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with heated and cooled cupholders. The cupholders are designed to help keep warm beverages warm and cool beverages cool.
Push the "Hot" symbol once to activate the cupholder; push the symbol a second time to turn off the cupholder.
WARNING!
When using the cupholder in the "Hot" position, avoid contact with the heated portion of the cupholder in order to reduce the possibility of burns. Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injuries, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise particular care in order to prevent serious burn injury. Keep the cupholder free of debris or stray objects when operated in the "Hot" position.
Heated And Cooled Cupholder Switches
Push the "Cold" symbol once to turn on the cupholder; push the symbol a second time to turn the cupholder off.
Rear Seat Cupholders
The rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest between the rear seats. The cupholders are positioned forward in the armrest and side-by-side to provide
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249
convenient access to beverage cans or bottles while Lighted Cupholders -- If Equipped
maintaining a resting place for the rear occupant's el- On some vehicles the rear cupholders are equipped with
bows.
a light ring that illuminates the cupholders for the rear
passengers. The light ring is controlled by the Dimmer Control. Refer to "Lights" in "Understanding The Fea- 3
tures Of Your Vehicle" for further information.
Rear Seat Cupholders
Light Ring In Rear Cupholder
250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
STORAGE
Console Features
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passenger side of the instrument panel.
There is a cubby bin located forward of the gear selector. The cubby bin is covered with a push-push actuated door. Push inward on the door to open it, push the door a second time to close it.
Two separate storage compartments are also located underneath the center console armrest.
Glove Compartment
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251
like CDs and tissue boxes. In addition, the 12 volt power outlet, USB and Aux jack are located here.
3
Center Console
Inside the center console armrest, there is a removable upper storage tray that can be slid forward/rearward on rails for access to the lower storage area. This tray has an integrated coin holder, along with additional area for small items like an ipod or phone. Below the upper tray, the lower storage compartment is made for larger items,
Upper Storage Tray
252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position. Driving with the console compartment lid open may result in injury in a collision.
Door Storage The door panels contain storage areas.
Front Door Trim Storage
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253
Rear Seat Armrest Storage -- If Equipped
Cargo Area -- Vehicles Equipped With 60/40
For rear passengers there is a storage bin located in the Split-Folding Rear Seat
armrest. Lift upward on the latch to open the storage The 60/40 split-folding rear seat provides cargo-carrying
compartment.
versatility. The seatbacks fold down easily by pulling nylon tabs between the seatbacks and the bolsters. When 3
the seats are folded down, they provide a continuous,
nearly-flat extension of the load floor.
When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the seatback above the seat strap.
WARNING!
· Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
Rear Armrest Storage
(Continued)
254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
position, the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury. · The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down position) should not be used as a play area by children when the vehicle is in motion. They could be seriously injured in a collision. Children should be seated and using the proper restraint system. · To help protect against personal injury, passengers should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats and use seat belts.
WARNING!
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal injury, follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle: · Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible. · Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the vehicle to sway. · Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the seatback. This could impair visibility or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision.
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Trunk Mat -- If Equipped
A trunk mat covers the bottom of the cargo area. The trunk mat is used to protect the interior of the trunk from mud, snow, and debris.
Grocery Bag Hooks
The rear cargo area is equipped with grocery bag hooks, located on either side of the rear cargo area.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255
3
Grocery Bag Hooks
CAUTION!
Do not exceed the maximum weight limit 50 lbs (22 kg) of the grocery bag hook. Damage may occur to hook and mounting surface.
256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Cargo Net The rear cargo area is equipped with a cargo net.
REAR WINDOW FEATURES Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on the climate control. Push this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of operation, push the button a second time.
Rear Cargo Net
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements: · Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water. · Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. · Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257
Power Sunshade -- If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a power sunshade that will reduce the amount of sunlight that will shine through the rear windshield.
3 The power sunshade can be operated using the Uconnect® System.
Push the "Controls" button and then push the "Rear Sunshade" button to raise the power sunscreen. Push the "Sunshade" button a second time to lower the sunshade.
If the sunshade is in the raised position and the vehicle is placed in REVERSE, the sunshade will automatically fully lower. When the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE the sunshade will automatically return to the fully raised position after a brief delay.
NOTE: The rear sunshade control switch can be locked out along with the rear passenger window controls from the driver switch window lockout switch.
258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The power sunshade can also be operated by passengers in the rears seats. The power sunshade switch is located on the back of the center console between the heated seat switches. Push the switch once to raise the sunshade. Push the switch a second time to lower the sunshade.
LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM -- IF EQUIPPED
The automatic load leveling system will provide a levelriding vehicle under most passenger and cargo loading conditions.
A hydraulic pump contained within the shock absorbers raises the rear of the vehicle to the correct height. It takes approximately 1 mile (1.6 km) of driving for the leveling to complete depending on road surface conditions.
If the leveled vehicle is not moved for approximately 15 hours, the leveling system will bleed itself down. The vehicle must be driven to reset the system.
Power Sunshade Switch
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .261 Customer Programmable Features --
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
Uconnect® 8.4 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279 4
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS . . . . .263 Uconnect® RADIOS -- IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .299
DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID) . . . . .272 iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
Engine Oil Life Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS . . . . . .301
DID Selectable Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274 Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
SETTING THE ANALOG CLOCK . . . . . . . . . . .277
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE -- IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
Uconnect® SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . . .302
Buttons On The Faceplate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
Buttons On The Touchscreen. . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Dual Zone Automatic Climate Controls With Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
Climate Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . .311 Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312 Uconnect® VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315 Introducing Uconnect® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315 Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316 Basic Voice Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318 Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319 Phone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
Voice Text Reply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 Climate (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322 Navigation (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323 Uconnect® Access (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . .324 Register (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325 Mobile App (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326 Voice Texting (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327 Yelp® (8.4A/8.4AN). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328 SiriusXM Travel LinkTM (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . .329 General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329 Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261
4
1 -- Air Outlet 2 -- Driver Information Display (DID) Controls 3 -- Driver Information Display (DID) 4 -- Speed Controls 5 -- Uconnect® System 6 -- Analog Clock
7 -- Glove Compartment 8 -- Uconnect® System Hard Controls 9 -- Switch Bank 10 -- Climate Control Hard Controls 11 -- Engine Start/Stop Button 12 -- Trunk Release Button
13 -- Headlight Switch 14 -- Adaptive Cruise Control 15 --Uconnect® Phone Controls
262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
1. Tachometer
This gauge measures engine (RPM x 1000).
revolutions-per-minute
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
2. High Beam Indicator
System (ABS)/Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will remain on until the condition 4
This indicator shows that the high beam head- has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
lights are on. Push the multifunction lever for- booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake
ward to switch the headlights to high beam, and pull and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
toward yourself (normal position) to return to low beam.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-
3. Brake Warning Light
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake application. If the brake light turns on, it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level.
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with The light will remain on until the cause is corrected. the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and the brake fluid level checked. If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
WARNING!
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
4. Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Refer to "Occupant Restraints" in "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle" for further information.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265
5. Driver Information Display (DID) Area
The odometer display shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven. The trip odometer shows individual trip mileage.
The DID features an interactive display. Refer to "Driver Information Display (DID)" in this section for further information.
6. Park/Headlight ON Indicator -- If Equipped
NOTE: U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the pur-
This indicator will illuminate when the park
lights or headlights are turned on.
4
chaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been
driven. If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair technician should leave the odometer reading
7. Front Fog Light Indicator -- If Equipped
the same as it was before the repair or service. If he/she
This indicator will illuminate when the front
cannot do so, then the odometer must be set at zero, and
fog lights are on.
a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the
mileage was before the repair or service. It is a good idea 8. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light -- If Equipped
for you to make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard
or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of
266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your sensor function checked.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267
9. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light -- If Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
With Drive Modes the ESC OFF indicator will be lit any time the Traction modes is set to Sport, Track or 4 Full OFF.
10. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
11. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/ Malfunction Indicator Light -- If Equipped
The "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position. It should go out with the engine running. If the "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" comes on continuously with the engine
268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
NOTE:
· The "ESC Off Indicator Light" and the "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN.
· Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC system will be ON, even if it was turned off previously.
· The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation.
12. Turn Signal Indicators
The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal when the turn signal lever is operated. If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on, a continuous chime will sound to alert you to turn the signals off. If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check for a defective outside light bulb. 13. Rear Fog Light Indicator
This indicator will illuminate when the rear fog lights are on. 14. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269
switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and may stay 16. Fuel Gauge
on for as long as four seconds.
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required. However,
17. Temperature Gauge
the conventional brake system will continue to operate The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera- 4
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, have or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
15. Fuel Door Reminder
The arrow in this symbol is a reminder that the Fuel Filler Door is located on the left side of the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads "H" pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
(Continued)
270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION! (Continued) with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the "H" and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the hood yourself, see "Maintaining Your Vehicle". Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph.
18. Seat Belt Reminder Light
When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/ RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if the driver's seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver's seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will illuminate and the chime will sound. Refer to "Occupant Restraints" in "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle" for further information.
19. Vehicle Security Light -- If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds, when the vehicle security alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
20. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of an Onboard Diagnostic system, called OBD, that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in the ON/RUN position, before engine start. If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the MIL after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine control system. It also could affect fuel economy and driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. 4 Immediate service is required.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.
272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID)
· Screen Setup
The Driver Information Display (DID) features an interactive display which is located in the instrument cluster.
This system conveniently allows the driver to select a variety of useful information by pushing the arrow buttons located on the left side of the steering wheel. The DID Menu Items consists of the following:
The system allows the driver to select information by pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering wheel:
· Speedometer
· Vehicle Info
· Driver Assist -- If Equipped
· Fuel Economy
· Trip
· Audio · Messages
DID Controls
Up And Down Arrow Buttons:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273
NOTE:
Using the Up or Down arrows allows you to · Holding the Up/Down or Left/Right arrow buttons
cycles through the Main Menu Items.
will loop the user through the currently selected menu
Changes the Main Screen area and Menu Title or options presented on the screen.
area.
· Main menu and submenu's wrap for continuous
scrolling.
4
Left And Right Arrow Buttons:
Using the Left or Right arrow buttons allows you to cycles through the submenu items of the Main menu item.
· Upon returning to a main menu, the last submenu screen viewed within that main menu will be displayed.
OK Button:
For Digital Speedometer
· Pushing the OK button changes units (MPH or km/h).
For Screen Setup and Vehicle Settings:
· OK button allows user to enter menu and submenus.
274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
· Within each submenu layer, the up/down arrows will allow the user to select the item of interest.
· Pushing the OK button makes the selection and a confirmation screen will appear (returning the user to the 1st page of the submenu).
· Pushing the left arrow button will exit each submenu layer and return to the main menu.
For the Trip and Fuel Economy menus (and new Performance Timers):
· Information is reset by pushing and holding the OK button.
Engine Oil Life Reset
Oil Change Required
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system. The "Oil Change Required" message will display in the DID for five seconds after a single
chime has sounded, to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each time you place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. To turn off the message temporarily, push and release the OK button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the following procedure.
DID Selectable Menu Items
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow buttons until the desired Selectable Menu item is displayed in the DID.
Follow the Menu or submenu prompts as desired.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275
Speedometer
Driver Assist
Push and release the OK button to toggle between MPH Fuel Economy
and km/h.
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
Vehicle Info
the Fuel Economy Menu item is highlighted in the DID.
The Vehicle Info consists of the following sub menu: · Tire Pressure Monitor · Coolant Temperature · Transmission Oil Temperature · Engine Oil Temperature · Oil Pressure · Oil Life · Battery Voltage · AWD Status -- If Equipped
· Two sub menu pages one with Current value dis- 4 played and one without the Current Value displayed: Current Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/l) Range To Empty (miles or km) Average Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/l) The Max and Min values will correspond to the particular engine requirements
· Lower end of gauge will be displayed in an amber color and turn green as Fuel Economy improves.
· Hold OK to reset average fuel economy information.
276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Trip Info
Stored Messages
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Trip Menu item is highlighted in the DID (Toggle left or right to select Trip A or Trip B). The Trip information will display the following:
· Distance
· Average Fuel Economy
· Elapsed Time
Hold the OK button to reset feature information.
Audio
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Audio Menu displays in the DID.
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Messages Menu item is highlighted in the DID. This feature shows the number of stored warning messages. Pushing the RIGHT arrow button will allow you to see what the stored messages are.
Screen Setup
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Screen Setup Menu displays in the DID. Push and release the OK button to enter the sub-menus. The Screen Setup feature allows you to change what information is displayed in the instrument cluster as well as the location that information is displayed.
SETTING THE ANALOG CLOCK
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277
Uconnect® SETTINGS
To set the analog clock at the top center of the instrument panel, push and hold the button until the setting is correct.
The Uconnect® system uses a combination of buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on the center of the instrument panel that allows you to access and change the customer programmable features.
4 CAUTION!
Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen, doing so can result in damage to the touchscreen.
Setting The Analog Clock
278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Buttons On The Faceplate
Buttons on the faceplate are located below the Uconnect® system in the center of the instrument panel. In addition, there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right side. Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), push the center of the control knob one or more times to select or change a setting (i.e., ON, OFF).
Your Uconnect® system may also have a Screen Off and Back buttons on the faceplate.
Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Buttons On The Touchscreen And Buttons On The Faceplate
1 -- Uconnect® Buttons On The Touchscreen 2 -- Uconnect® Buttons On The Faceplate
Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to turn off the Uconnect® screen. Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate a second time to turn the screen on.
Push the Back button on the faceplate to exit out of a Menu or certain option on the Uconnect® system.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Engine Off Options, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth®,
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the SiriusXM Setup, Restore Settings, Clear Personal Data
Uconnect® Touchscreen.
and System Information.
NOTE:
CAUTION!
Do not attach any object to touchscreen, doing so can result in damage to the touchscreen.
· Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time. 4
· Depending on the vehicles options, feature settings may vary.
Customer Programmable Features -- Uconnect® 8.4 Settings
Press the "Apps," or the "Controls," button on the touchscreen, then press the "Settings" button on the touchscreen to display the menu setting screen. In this mode the Uconnect® system allows you to access programmable features that may be equipped such as Display, Units, Voice, Clock, Safety & Driving Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start,
When making a selection, press the button on the touchscreen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired mode, press and release the preferred setting until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Once the setting is complete, either press the Back Arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or press the "X" button on the touchscreen to close out of the settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button on the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the available settings.
280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Display
After pressing the "Display" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available: · Display Mode
When in this display you may select one of the auto display settings. To change Mode status, press and release the "Manual" or "Auto" button on the touchscreen. Then press the back arrow button on the touchscreen.
NOTE: When Day or Night is selected for the Display Mode, the usage of the Parade Mode feature will cause the radio to activate the Display Brightness Day control even though the headlights are on.
· Display Brightness With Headlights ON
When in this display, you may select the brightness with the headlights on. Adjust the brightness with the "+" and "" setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any
point on the scale between the "+" and "" buttons on the touchscreen. Then press the back arrow button on the touchscreen.
NOTE: To make changes to the Display Brightness with Headlights ON setting, the headlights must be on and the interior dimmer switch must not be in the party or parade positions.
· Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
When in this display, you may select the brightness with the headlights off. Adjust the brightness with the "+" and "" setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the "+" and "" buttons on the touchscreen. Then press the back arrow button on the touchscreen.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281
NOTE: To make changes to the Display Brightness with · Touchscreen Beep
Headlights OFF setting, the headlights must be off and the interior dimmer switch must not be in the party or parade positions.
· Set Theme -- If Equipped
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the sound heard when a touchscreen button (button on the touchscreen) is pressed. Press the "Touchscreen Beep" button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears
This feature will allow you to choose a theme for the display next to the setting, showing that setting has been se- 4
screen. The theme will change the background color, high- lected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to
light color, and button color of the display screen.
return to the previous menu.
· Set Language
· Control Screen Time-Out -- If Equipped
When in this display, you may select one of multiple languages (English / Français / Español) for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the Set Language button on the touchscreen, then press the desired language button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the language, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
When this feature is selected, the Controls Screen will stay open for five seconds before the screen times out. With the feature deselected, the screen will stay open until it is manually closed. Press the Control Screen Time-Out button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
· Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster -- If Equipped
· Distance
When this feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route. To make your selection, press the "Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster" button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
Units
After pressing the "Units" button on the touchscreen you may select each unit of measure independently displayed in the Driver Information Display (DID), and navigation system (if equipped). The following selectable units of measure are listed below:
· Speed
Select from: "mi" or "km." · Fuel Consumption
Select from: "MPG" (US), "MPG" (UK), "L/100 km" or "km/L." · Pressure
Select from: "psi," "kPa," or "bar." · Temperature
Select from: "°C," or "°F."
After the desired setting has been selected, press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
Select from: "MPH" or "km/h."
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283
Voice
next to the setting, showing that setting has been se-
After pressing the "Voice" button on the touchscreen the lected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to
following settings will be available:
return to the previous menu.
· Voice Response Length
Clock
When in this display, you may change the Voice Response Length settings. To change the Voice Response
After pressing the "Clock" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
4
Length, press the "Brief" or "Detailed" button on the · Sync Time With GPS
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· Show Command List
This feature will allow you to automatically have the radio set the time. To change the Sync Time setting, press the "Sync time with GPS" button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on
When in this display, you may change the Show Com- the touchscreen to return to the previous menu. mand List settings. To change the Show Command List · Set Time Hours
settings, press the "Always," "With Help" or "Never" button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears
This feature will allow you to adjust the hours. The "Sync time with GPS" button on the touchscreen must be
unchecked. To make your selection, press the "+" or ""
284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the hours up or down. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· Set Time Minutes
This feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. The "Sync time with GPS" button on the touchscreen must be unchecked. To make your selection, press the "+" or "" buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the minutes up or down. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· Time Format
This feature will allow you to select the time format display setting. Press the "Time Format" button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the 12hrs or 24hrs setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· Show Time In Status Bar -- If Equipped
This feature will allow you to turn on or shut off the digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show Time Status setting press the "Show Time in Status Bar" button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu or press the "X" button on the touchscreen to close out of the settings screen.
Safety & Driving Assistance
After pressing the "Safety & Driving Assistance" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available: · Forward Collision Warning -- If Equipped
The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature provides an audible and/or visual warning to potential forward collisions. The feature can be can be set to Far, or set to
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285
Near. The default status of FCW is the Far setting. This ABA system becomes active at 5 mph (8 km/h). To make
means the system will warn you of a possible collision your selection, press the "Forward Collision Warning
with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther Active Braking" button on the touchscreen, until a check-
away. This gives you the most reaction time. To change mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting
the setting for more dynamic driving, select the Near had been selected. Press the back arrow button on the
setting. This warns you of a possible collision when you touchscreen to return to the previous menu. For further are much closer to the vehicle in front of you. To change information, refer to "Forward Collision Warning (FCW) 4
the FCW status, press and release the "Near" or "Far" With Mitigation" in "Understanding The Features Of
button. Then press the back arrow button on the touch- Your Vehicle."
screen.
· LaneSense Warning -- If Equipped
For further information, refer to "Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle".
· Forward Collision Warning (FCW) -- Active Braking
When this feature is selected, it sets the distance at which the steering wheel will provide feedback for potential lane departures. The LDW sensitivity can be set to provide either an "Early," "Medium," or "Late" warning
The FCW system includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA). zone start point.
When this feature is selected, the ABA applies additional For further information, refer to "LaneSense Warning
brake pressure when the driver requests insufficient (LDW)" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Ve-
brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. The hicle".
286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
· LaneSense Strength -- If Equipped
When this feature is selected, it sets the strength of the steering wheel feedback for potential lane departures. The amount of directional torque the steering system can apply to the steering wheel to correct for vehicle lane departure can be set at "Low," "Medium" or "High."
For further information, refer to "Lane Departure Warning (LDW)" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle".
· Steering Feel Options -- If Equipped
The Steering Feel Options feature will allow you to adjust the steering effort and feel. Press the "Sport" button on the touchscreen to provide the greatest amount of steering feel, requiring the highest amount of steering effort. Press the "Normal" button on the touchscreen to provide greater steering feel, requiring greater steering effort. Press the "Comfort" button on the touchscreen to provide
a balance of steering feel and steering effort. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· ParkSense®
The ParkSense® system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h). It will provide an alert (audible and/or visual) to indicate the proximity to other objects. The system can be enabled with Sound Only, or Sound and Display. To change the ParkSense® status, press and release the "Sound Only" or "Sound and Display" button. Then press the back arrow button on the touchscreen. Refer to "ParkSense®" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle" for system function and operating information.
· Front ParkSense® Volume
The Front ParkSense® Chime Volume settings can be selected from the DID or Uconnect® System. The chime
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287
volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and HIGH. The · Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse
factory default volume setting is MEDIUM. To make your selection, press the "Front ParkSense® Vol." button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting had been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu. ParkSense® will retain its last known configuration state through ignition cycles.
When this feature is selected, the exterior sideview mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the RUN position and the transmission shift lever is in the REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE. To make your selection, press the "Tilt Side Mirrors in Reverse" button on the touchscreen, until a
4
· Rear ParkSense® Volume
check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the
The Rear ParkSense® Chime Volume settings can be se- setting had been selected. Press the back arrow button on lected from the DID or Uconnect® System. The chime the touchscreen to return to the previous menu. volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and HIGH. The · Blind Spot Alert
factory default volume setting is MEDIUM. To make your selection, press the "Rear ParkSense® Vol." button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting had been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu. ParkSense® will retain its last known configuration state through ignition cycles.
When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature Provides alerts, visual and/or audible, to indicate objects in your blind spot. The Blind Spot Alert feature can be activated in "Lights" mode. When this mode is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and will only show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors.
288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
When "Lights & Chime" mode is activated, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors as well as an audible alert when the turn signal is on. When "Off" is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated. To change the Blind Spot Alert status, press the "Off," "Lights" or "Lights & Chime" button on the touchscreen. Then press the back arrow button on the touchscreen.
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not operating to specification.
· ParkView® Backup Camera Active Guidelines
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera Active Guidelines that allows you to see active guidelines over the ParkView Back up camera
display whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a caution note to "check entire surroundings" across the top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will disappear. To make your selection, press the "ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines" button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting had been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· ParkView® Backup Camera Delay
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen appears again. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned ON), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of "REVERSE" unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289
8 mph (12 km/h), the transmission is shifted into · Hill Start Assist -- If Equipped
"PARK" or the ignition is switched to the OFF position. To set the ParkView® Backup Camera Delay press the "Controls" button on the touchscreen, the "settings" button on the touchscreen, then the "Safety & Driving Assistance" button on the touchscreen. Press the "Parkview Backup Camera Delay" button on the touchscreen to turn the ParkView® Delay ON or OFF.
When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA) system is active. Refer to "Electronic Brake Control System" in "Starting And Operating" for system function and operating information. To make your selection, press the "Hill Start Assist" button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting had been selected. Press the back arrow button on
4
· Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
When this feature is selected, the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the windshield. To make your selection, press the "Rain Sensing Auto Wipers" button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting had been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
Lights
After pressing the "Lights" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available. · Headlight Off Delay
When this feature is selected, it allows adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine is shut off. To change the Headlights Off Delay setting, press the "+" or "-" button on the touchscreen to select
290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
your desired time interval, and choose either 0 sec, 30 sec, 60 sec or 90 seconds. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.
· Headlight Illumination On Approach
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status, press the "+" or "-" button on the touchscreen to select your desired time interval. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.
· Headlights With Wipers -- If Equipped
When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make your selection, press the "Headlights With Wipers" button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.
· Auto Dim High Beams -- If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights will activate/deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To make your selection, press the "Auto High Beams" button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push the back button on the faceplate. Refer to "Lights -- If Equipped" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle" for further information.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291
· Daytime Running Lights -- If Equipped
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on whenever the engine is running. To make your selection,
to return to the previous menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.
press the "Daytime Running Lights" button on the touch- Doors & Locks
screen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indi- After pressing the "Doors & Locks" button on the touch-
cating that the setting has been selected. Press the back screen the following settings will be available:
4
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.
· Auto Unlock On Exit
· Flash Lights With Lock
When this feature is selected, the hazard lights will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, or when using the passive entry feature. This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To make your selection, press the "Flash Lights with Lock" button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting has been
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver's door is opened. To make your selection, press the "Auto Unlock On Exit" button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that the setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
· Flash Lights With Lock
· Sound Horn With Remote Start
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, or when using the passive entry feature. This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To make your selection, press the "Flash Lights with Lock" button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· Sound Horn With Lock
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when the door locks are activated. To make your selection, press either the "Off," "1st Press," or "2nd Press" button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when the remote start is activated. To make your selection, press the "Sound Horn with Remote Start" button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
When Driver Door is selected with 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks, only the driver's door will unlock with the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. You must press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger's doors. When All Doors is selected for 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks, all doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293
NOTE: If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob setting, showing that the setting has been selected. Press
Unlocks "All Doors," all doors will unlock no matter the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If previous menu. Refer to "Keyless Enter-N-GoTM" in
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks "Driver Door" is pro- "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle".
grammed, only the driver's door will unlock when the · Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob On/Off -- If
driver's door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press Equipped Of Key Fob Unlocks "Driver Door" is programmed,
4
touching the handle more than once will only result in This feature provides automatic recall of all settings
the driver's door opening. If "Driver Door" is selected, stored to a memory location (driver's seat, exterior
once the driver door is opened, the interior door lock/ mirrors, steering column position and radio station pre-
unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use sets) to enhance driver mobility when entering and
RKE transmitter).
exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press the
· Passive Entry
"Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob" button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles showing that setting has been selected. Press the back
door(s) without having to push the Remote Keyless Entry arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
(RKE) transmitter LOCK or UNLOCK buttons. To make menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.
your selection, press the "Passive Entry" button on the
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to the
294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set to ON) when the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is used to unlock the door. Refer to "Driver Memory Seat" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle" for further information.
Vehicle Start" button to select from "Off," "Remote Start" or "All Starts" until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
Engine Off Options
Auto Comfort Systems -- If Equipped
After pressing the "Auto-On Comfort" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
· Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start -- If Equipped
When this feature is selected the driver's heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn ON when temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will turn ON. To make your selection, press the "Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel With
After pressing the "Engine Off Options" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
· Easy Exit Seat -- If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the Driver's seat will automatically move rearward once the engine is shut off. To make your selection, press the "Easy Exit Seat" button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295
· Engine Off Power Delay
select your desired time interval. Press the back arrow
When this feature is selected, the power window switches, button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
radio, Uconnect® Phone system (if equipped), DVD video Audio
system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. To change the Engine Off Power Delay
After pressing the "Audio" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available.
· Balance/Fade
4
setting, press the "+" or "-" button on the touchscreen to select your desired time interval, and choose from "0 seconds," "45 seconds," "5 minutes" or "10 minutes." Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· Headlight Off Delay
This feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade settings. Press and drag the speaker icon, use the arrows to adjust, or tap the `C' icon to readjust to the center. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· Equalizer
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off Delay status press the "+" or "" button on the touchscreen to
This feature allows you to adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the "+" and "" setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on
296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
the scale between the "+" and "" buttons on the touchscreen. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as press directly on the desired setting.
· Speed Adjusted Volume
This feature increases or decreases volume relative to vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume press the "Off," "1," "2" or "3" button on the touchscreen. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· Surround Sound -- If Equipped
This feature provides simulated surround sound mode. To make your selection, press the "Surround Sound"
button on the touchscreen, select "On" or "Off." Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· AUX Volume Offset -- If Equipped
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input. To make your selection, press the AUX Volume Match button on the touchscreen, choose a level from 3 to +3. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· Loudness -- If Equipped
Loudness improves sound quality at lower volumes. To make your selection, press the "Loudness" button on the touchscreen, then choose "Yes" or "No." Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
Phone/Bluetooth®
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297
SiriusXM Setup -- If Equipped
After pressing the "Phone/Bluetooth®" button on the After pressing the "SiriusXM Setup" button on the touch-
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
screen, the following settings will be available:
· Paired Phones
· Channel Skip
This feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude
4
to the Uconnect® Supplement Manual.
undesirable channels while scanning. To make your selec-
· Paired Audio Sources
tion, press the "Channel Skip" button on the touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip followed by
This feature shows which audio devices are paired to the pressing the back arrow button on the touchscreen.
Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer to the Uconnect® Supplement Manual.
· Subscription Information
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
with your radio. Following the expiration of the free
services, it will be necessary to access the information on
the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press the "Subscription Info" button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider online.
select "Yes" to restore, or "Cancel" to exit. Once the settings are restored, a pop up appears stating settings reset to default. Press the okay button on the touchscreen to exit.
Clear Personal Data
NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription and is available for U.S. residents only.
Restore Settings
After pressing the "Restore Settings" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available: · Restore Settings
When this feature is selected it will reset the Display, Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their default settings. To restore the settings to their default setting, press the Restore Settings button. A pop-up will appear asking Are you sure you want to reset your settings to default?"
After pressing the "Clear Personal Data Settings" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
· Clear Personal Data
When this feature is selected it will remove personal data including Bluetooth® devices and presets. To remove personal information, press the "Clear Personal Data" button and a pop-up will appear asking Are you sure you want to clear all personal data?" select "OK" to Clear, or "Cancel" to exit. Once the data has been cleared, a pop up appears stating Personal data cleared". Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299
System Information
iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL
After pressing the "System Information" button on the This feature allows an iPod® or an external USB device to
touchscreen the following information will be available: be plugged into the USB port.
· System Information
iPod® control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod®
When System Information is selected, a System Information screen will appear displaying the system software
and iPhone® devices. Some iPod® software versions may not fully support the iPod® control features. Please
4
version.
visit Apple's website for software updates.
Uconnect® RADIOS -- IF EQUIPPED
The Media hub also allows the use of an SD card. For further information, refer to the Uconnect® Supplement
For detailed information about your Uconnect® radio, Manual.
refer to your Uconnect® Supplement Manual.
300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
AUX/USB/SD Card Ports
1 -- Aux Jack 2 -- USB Port 3 -- SD Card Slot
Rear USB Charging Ports
The USB "Charge Only" ports will recharge battery operated USB devices when connected.
Located on the rear of the front center console are dual USB "Charge Only" ports.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel at the three and nine o'clock positions.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a push-button in the center and controls the volume and mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
Pushing the center button will make the radio switch 4 between the various modes available (AM/FM/SXM/
AUX/VES, etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a push-button in the center. The function of the left-hand control is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in each mode.
Radio Operation
Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering Pushing the top of the switch will "Seek" up for the next
Wheel)
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch
will "Seek" down for the next listenable station.
302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The button located in the center of the left-hand control will tune to the next preset station that you have programmed in the radio preset button.
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE -- IF EQUIPPED
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth, wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratching the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners, or anti-static sprays.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high.
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular disc, it may be damaged (e.g., scratched, reflective coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc) oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known good disc before considering disc player service.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303
not satisfactorily "clear" by the repositioning of the an- Dual Zone Automatic Climate Controls With
tenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be turned Touchscreen
down or off during mobile phone operation when not using Uconnect® (if equipped).
Buttons On The Faceplate
The buttons on the faceplate are located below the
CLIMATE CONTROLS
Uconnect® screen.
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to
4
make you comfortable in all types of weather. This
system can be operated through either the controls on the
instrument panel or through the Uconnect® system dis-
play.
When the Uconnect® system is in different modes (Radio, Player, Settings, More, etc.) the driver and passenger temperature settings will be indicated at the top of the display.
Automatic Climate Controls -- Buttons On The Faceplate
304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the Uconnect® system screen.
Button Descriptions (Applies To Both Buttons On The Faceplate And Buttons On The Touchscreen)
1. MAX A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.
2. A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this function again will cause the A/C operation to switch into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.
Uconnect® 8.4 Automatic Temperature Controls -- Buttons On The Touchscreen
3. Recirculation Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when ON.
4. AUTO Operation Button
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305
6. Rear Defrost Button
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by Press and release this button to turn on the rear window
adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped).
this function will cause the system to switch between An indicator will illuminate when the rear window
manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to "Automatic defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
Operation" for more information.
turns off after 10 minutes.
4
5. Front Defrost Button
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature is ON. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging. Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode. If the front defrost mode is turned off the climate system will return the previous setting.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements: · Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water.
(Continued)
306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION! (Continued) · Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. · Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
7. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button
Provides the passenger with independent temperature control. Push the button on the faceplate for warmer temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the temperature bar button towards the red arrow for warmer temperature settings.
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will automatically exit Sync.
8. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button
Provides the passenger with independent temperature control. Push the button on the faceplate for cooler
temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the temperature bar button towards the blue arrow for cooler temperature settings.
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will automatically exit Sync.
9. SYNC
Press the Sync button on the touchscreen to toggle the Sync feature On/Off. The Sync indicator is illuminated when this feature is enabled. Sync is used to synchronize the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature setting. Changing the passenger temperature setting while in Sync will automatically exit this feature.
10. Blower Control
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307
speeds can be selected using either the blower control 11. Modes
knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen as follows:
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
Blower Control Knob On The Faceplate
defrost outlets and demist outlets. The Mode settings are
The blower speed increases as you turn the blower as follows:
control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. · Panel Mode
4
The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob counterclockwise.
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
Button On The Touchscreen
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting. Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area between the icons.
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
· Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
· Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets. · Mix Mode
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window demist outlets. This mode works best in cold or snowy conditions.
12. Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control ON/OFF.
13. Driver Temperature Control Down Button
Provides the driver with independent temperature control. Push the button on the faceplate for cooler temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the temperature bar button towards the blue arrow for cooler temperature settings.
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same time.
14. Driver Temperature Control Up Button
Provides the driver with independent temperature control. Push the button on the faceplate for warmer temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the temperature bar button towards the red arrow for warmer temperature settings.
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same time.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309
Climate Control Functions
· If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
A/C (Air Conditioning)
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (located in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from
to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning the front of the radiator and through the condenser.
system. When the air conditioning system is turned on,
cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into MAX A/C
4
the cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling perfor-
button to turn off the air conditioning and manually mance.
adjust the blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make
sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the
prior settings. The button illuminates when MAX A/C is
NOTE:
ON.
· If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass, select Defrost mode and increase blower speed if needed.
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the selected setting and MAX A/C to exit.
310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Recirculation Control
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired, you may wish to recirculate interior air by pressing the Recirculation control button. The recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button is selected. Push the button a second time to turn off the Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle.
NOTE: In cold weather, use of recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation feature may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the windshield. On systems with Manual Climate Controls, the Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to improve window clearing operation. Recirculation will be disabled automatically if this mode is selected. Attempting to use Recirculation while in this mode will cause the LED in the control button to blink and then turn off.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
NOTE:
Automatic Operation
· It is not necessary to move the temperature settings.
1. Press the AUTO button on the faceplate or the AUTO button on the touchscreen on the Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.
The system automatically adjusts the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the system to maintain by adjusting the driver and passenger temperature control buttons. Once the desired temperature is displayed, the system will achieve and
· The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric units by selecting the US/M customer-programmable feature. Refer to the "Uconnect® System Settings" in this section of the manual.
4
automatically maintain that comfort level.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain 3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is on low until the engine warms up. The blower will
not necessary to change the settings. You will experi- increase in speed and transition into Auto mode. ence the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the
system to function automatically.
312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Manual Operation Override
Operating Tips
The system allows for manual selection of blower speed, NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
air distribution mode, A/C status and recirculation con- suggested control settings for various weather condi-
trol.
tions.
The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by adjusting the blower control. The fan will now operate at a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected. This allows the front occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode.
The operator can also select the direction of the airflow by selecting one of the available mode settings. A/C operation and Recirculation control can also be manually selected in Manual operation.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating. A solution of 50% OAT (Organic Additive Technology) coolant that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS.90032 and 50% water is recommended. Refer to "Maintenance Procedures" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for proper coolant selection.
NOTE: Each of these features operates independently from each other. If any feature is controlled manually, temperature control will continue to operate automatically.
Winter Operation
Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months is not recommended because it may cause window fogging.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313
Vacation Storage
· Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will automati-
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
cally adjust the climate control settings to reduce or eliminate window fogging on the front windshield. When this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable.
fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure Outside Air Intake
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
4
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
Window Fogging
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The Defrost/Floor winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and slush, and snow.
provide sufficient heating. If side window fogging becomes objectionable, increase blower speed to improve airflow
A/C Air Filter
and clearing of the side windows. Vehicle windows tend to The climate control system filters outside air containing
fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid weather.
dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be
NOTE:
totally filtered out. Refer to "Maintenance Procedures" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for filter replacement instruc-
· Recirculate without A/C should not be used for long tions.
periods, as fogging may occur.
314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Manual Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions
Uconnect® VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
Introducing Uconnect®
Start using Uconnect® Voice Recognition with these helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and tips you need to know to control your Uconnect® 5.0 or 8.4A/8.4AN system.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315
4
Uconnect® 8.4AN
If you see the icon on your touchscreen, you have the Uconnect® 8.4AN system. If not, you have a Uconnect® 8.4A system.
316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Get Started
All you need to control your Uconnect® system with your voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and feature compatibility and to find phone pairing instructions.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first push either the VR or Phone button, wait until after the beep, then say your Voice Command.
5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice Command from current category.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conversations are examples of noise that may impact recognition.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing straight ahead. The microphone is positioned on the rearview mirror and aimed at the driver.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any point while using your Uconnect® system.
Push the VR button . After the beep, say:
· Cancel to stop a current voice session
4
· Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
· Repeat to listen to the system prompts again
Uconnect® Voice Command
1 -- Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Receive A Text 2 -- For all radios: Push To Begin Radio or Media functions. For 8.4A/8.4AN only: Push to begin Navigation, Apps And Climate Functions 3 -- Push To End Call
318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice recognition system's status. Cues appear on the touchscreen.
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button . After the beep, say:
· Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM
· Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1
Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or want to learn a Voice Command, push the VR button
and say "Help." The system will provide you with a list of commands.
Media
Uconnect® offers connections via USB, SD, Bluetooth® and auxiliary ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only available for connected USB and iPod® devices. (Remote CD player optional and not available on all vehicles.)
Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of the 4 following commands and follow the prompts to switch your media source or choose an artist.
· Change source to Bluetooth®
· Change source to iPod®
· Change source to USB
· Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play song Moonlight Sonata; Play genre Classical
Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Radio
320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all of the music on your iPod® or USB device. Your Voice Command must match exactly how the artist, album, song and genre information is displayed.
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy with Uconnect®. When the Phonebook button is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and pairing instructions.
Push the Phone button . After the beep, say one of the following commands:
· Call John Smith
· Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts
· Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)
· Call back (call previous incoming phone number)
Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Media
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone Voice Text Reply
button and say "Call," then pronounce the name exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say "Call John Smith work."
Uconnect® will announce incoming text messages. Push the Phone button and say Listen. (Must have compatible mobile phone paired to Uconnect® system.)
1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push the Phone button . After the beep, say: "Reply." 4
2. Listen to the Uconnect® prompts. After the beep, repeat one of the pre-defined messages and follow the system prompts.
Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Phone
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes.
Stuck in Traffic. See you later.
No.
Start without me.
I'll be Late.
Okay. Call me.
Where are you?
Are you there yet?
I will be <number> minutes late.
322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
I'll call you later.
I'm on my way. I'm lost.
I need directions.
Can't talk right now.
See you in <number> of
minutes.
Thanks.
TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementation of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advantage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com. Apple iPhone® iOS6 or later supports reading incoming text messages only.
Climate (8.4A/8.4AN)
Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures handsfree and keep everyone comfortable while you keep moving ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate control.)
Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of the following commands:
· Set driver temperature to 70 degrees
· Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323
TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be used to Navigation (8.4A/8.4AN)
adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle. Voice The Uconnect® navigation feature helps you save time
Command will not work to adjust the heated seats or and become more productive when you know exactly
steering wheel if equipped.
how to get to where you want to go. (Navigation is
optional on the Uconnect® 8.4A system. See your dealer
to activate navigation at any time.)
4
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button . After the beep, say:
· For the 8.4A Uconnect® System, say: "Enter state."
· For the 8.4AN Uconnect® System, say: "Navigate to 800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills, Michigan."
2. Then follow the system prompts.
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Climate
324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button the beep, say: " Find nearest coffee shop."
. After
Uconnect® Access (8.4A/8.4AN)
An included trial and/or subscription is required to take advantage of the Uconnect® Access services in the next section of this guide. To register with Uconnect® Access, press the Apps button on the 8.4-inch touchscreen to get started. Detailed registration instructions can be found on the next page.
NOTE: Uconnect® Access is available only on equipped vehicles purchased within the continental United States and Alaska. Services can only be used where coverage is available; see coverage map for details.
9-1-1 Call
Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Navigation
Security Alarm Notification Remote Door Lock/Unlock
Stolen Vehicle Assistance
Remote Vehicle Start**
Remote Horn and Lights Yelp® Search Voice Texting Roadside Assistance Call Wi-Fi Hotspot*** **If vehicle is equipped. ***Extra charges apply.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325
Register (8.4A/8.4AN)
1. Press the Apps button on the bottom of the 8.4-inch touchscreen.
2. If a pop-up message appears, press Register or go to
the Favorite Apps menu and press Uconnect® Regis-
tration.
4
3. Read through the registration instructions. Enter and confirm your personal email address. Then press Send.
4. Check your personal inbox for an email from Uconnect® Access.
326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
5. Click on the link inside the email within 72 hours and complete the easy online registration process to create a personal Mopar® Owner Connect account linked to your vehicle.
Mobile App (8.4A/8.4AN)
Securely link your mobile device to your vehicle with the Uconnect® Access App. Once you have downloaded the App, you may start your vehicle or lock it from virtually any distance. (Vehicle must be properly equipped with factory-installed Remote Start.)
Uconnect® Registration 8.4A/8.4AN
Mobile App
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327
Download the Uconnect® Access App to a compatible 2. Listen to the prompt. After the beep, dictate the
Apple® or Android® mobile devices. All you need to do is: message you would like to send. Wait for Uconnect®
1. After registering with Uconnect® Access, log on to to process your message.
your Mopar® Owner Connect account at 3. The Uconnect® system will repeat your message and
moparownerconnect.com.
provide a variety of options to add to, delete, send or
2. On the Dashboard page, enter your mobile phone number to receive a link to download the App on your mobile device. Or go to iTunes®, or Google Play, and
hear the message again. After the beep, tell Uconnect® 4 what you'd like to do. For instance, if you're happy
with your message, after the beep, say: "Send."
search for the Uconnect® Access App.
You must be registered with Uconnect® Access and have
a compatible MAP enabled smartphone to use your 3. To activate the App, enter your Mopar Owner Connect voice to send a personalized text message.
user name and password and log in. Your vehicle is
then connected to your mobile device.
TIP:
Voice Texting (8.4A/8.4AN)
· Not compatible with iPhone®.
1. To send a message, push the Phone button . After · Messages are limited to 140 characters.
the beep, say the following command: "Send mes- · The Messaging button on the touchscreen must be
sage to John Smith."
illuminated to use the feature.
328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Yelp® (8.4A/8.4AN)
Once registered with Uconnect® Access, you can use your voice to search for the most popular places or things around you.
TIP: Once you perform a search, you can reorganize the results by selecting either the Best Match, Rating or Distance tab on the top of the touchscreen display.
1. Press the "Apps" button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the "All Apps" button on the touchscreen.
3. Press the "Yelp" button on the touchscreen.
4. Once the YELP® home screen appears on the touchscreen, push the VR button , then say: "YELP search."
5. Listen to the system prompts and after the beep, tell Uconnect® the place or business that you'd like Uconnect® to find.
Yelp®
SiriusXM Travel LinkTM (8.4A/8.4AN)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329
Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings,
check a sports score or the 5 - day weather forecast?
SiriusXM Travel LinkTM is a suite of services that brings a
wealth of information right to your Uconnect® 8.4AN
system. (Not available for 8.4A system.)
4
Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of the
following commands:
· Show fuel prices
· Show 5 - day weather forecast · Show extended weather
TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice Command.
SiriusXM Travel LinkTM General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. This device must accept any interference that may be and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. Yelp,
received including interference that may cause unde- Yelp logo, Yelp burst and related marks are registered
sired operation.
trademarks of Yelp.
NOTE:
Uconnect® System Support:
· The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the device.
· The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
Additional Information
© 2015 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks
· U.S. residents call 1-877-855-8400 or visit DriveUconnect.com
· Canadian residents call 1-800-465-2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983 (French) or visit DriveUconnect.ca
Mon. Fri., 7:00 am 12:00 am, ET
Sat., 8:00 am 10:00 pm, ET
Sun., 9:00 am 5:00 pm, ET
Uconnect® Access Services Support 1-855-792-4241. Please have your Uconnect® Security PIN ready when you call.
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335 Key Ignition Park Interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335 Keyless Enter-N-GoTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .342 Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . .342 5
Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336 AUTOSTICK -- IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . .350
Extreme Cold Weather (Below 20°F Or -29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338 After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER -- IF EQUIPPED . . .340 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . .340
ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) -- IF EQUIPPED . .352 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES . . . . . . . . .353
Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353 Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354 DRIVING THROUGH WATER . . . . . . . . . . . . .354 Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
332 STARTING AND OPERATING
Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
Rain Brake Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ENGINE ONLY -- IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
Synchronizing ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360 Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .361 Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . .376
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . .361 Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . .377
Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . .363 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .379
Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364 TIRES -- GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .384
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . .365 Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368 Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
Ready Alert Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370 Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .387
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387
STARTING AND OPERATING 333
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409
Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388 FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409
Run Flat Tires -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .390 3.6L Engine -- If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409
Spare Tires -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390 5.7L Engine -- If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392 Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393 Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411 5
Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394 E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . .411
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394 MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . . .396 Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .397 Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . .399 Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401 FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) -- IF
Premium System -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .404
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414
334 STARTING AND OPERATING
E-85 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) . . . . . . . . .422
Ethanol Fuel (E-85) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414 Overloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415 Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles (E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416 Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416
TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423 Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . .424 Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427 Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417 Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417 Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release. . . . . . . . .420 Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421 Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) . . . . . . .422
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
Two-Wheel Drive And All-Wheel Drive . . . . . .436
STARTING AND OPERATING 335
STARTING PROCEDURES
WARNING! (Continued)
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts.
· Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to children), and do not leave the ignition (of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-GoTM) in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
WARNING!
controls, or move the vehicle.
5
· When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the Automatic Transmission
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the Key Fob
from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
· Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in before shifting into any driving gear.
a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the trans-
mission gear selector.
(Continued)
336 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed: · Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed. · Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop. · Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed. · Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
Keyless Enter-N-GoTM
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push of a button, as long as the Remote Start/Keyless Enter-N-GoTM Key Fob is in the passenger compartment.
Normal Starting
Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button 1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL. 2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once. 3. The system takes over and attempts to start the
vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically after 10 seconds.
STARTING AND OPERATING 337
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to shut off. The ignition switch position will remain in
the engine starting, push the button again.
the ACC position until the shift lever/gear selector is
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal.
in PARK and the button is pushed twice to the OFF position. If the shift lever/gear selector is not in PARK and the ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed once, the DID will display a "Vehicle Not In Park"
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
message and the engine will remain running. Never
START/STOP Button 1. Place the shift lever/gear selector in PARK, then push
leave a vehicle out of the PARK position, or it could 5 roll.
and release the ENGINE START/STOP button.
NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
(engine not running) position and the transmission is in PARK, the system will automatically time out after 30
3. If the shift lever/gear selector is not in PARK, the minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the
ENGINE START/STOP button must be held for two OFF position.
seconds or three short pushes in a row with the vehicle
speed above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine will
338 STARTING AND OPERATING
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions -- With Driver's Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or NEUTRAL Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an ignition switch. It has three positions, OFF, ACC, RUN. To change the ignition switch positions without starting the vehicle and use the accessories follow these steps:
1. Starting with the ignition in the OFF position:
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to change the ignition to the ACC position.
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time to change the ignition to the RUN position.
4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to return the ignition to the OFF position.
Extreme Cold Weather (Below 20°F Or -29°C) To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an externally powered electric engine block heater (available from your authorized dealer) is recommended. If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING! · Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing serious personal injury.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
· Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle.
· If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to "Jump-Starting" in "What To Do In Emergencies" for further information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 339
Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE START/STOP Button)
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the "Normal Starting" or "Extreme Cold Weather procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel:
1. Press and hold the brake pedal.
2. Press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and 5 hold it.
3. Push and release the ENGINE START/STOP button once.
The starter motor will engage automatically, run for 10 seconds, and then disengage. Once this occurs, release the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the "Normal Starting" procedure.
340 STARTING AND OPERATING
After Starting The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER -- IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause electrocution.
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded, three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on the driver side of the vehicle. It has a removable cap that is located near the air box.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
· It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) · Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, turn the engine OFF, and remove the Key Fob. When the ignition is in the OFF position, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement. · When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle. · Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 341
WARNING! (Continued) seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector. · Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to children), and do not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child could operate power windows, other con- 5 trols, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed: · Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
(Continued)
342 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued) · Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEU-
TRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed. · Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting out of PARK.
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the engine can be turned off. This helps the driver avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing the transmission in PARK.
This system also locks the transmission in PARK whenever the ignition switch is in the OFF position.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the transmission gear selector in PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission out of PARK, the engine must be running and the brake pedal must be pressed.
The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds.
Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission
The transmission is controlled using a rotary electronic gear selector located on the center console. The transmission gear range (PRNDL/S) is displayed both above the gear selector and in the Driver Information Display (DID). To select a gear range, simply rotate the gear selector. To access the L or S position, push down on the gear selector and then rotate it. You must also press the brake pedal to shift the transmission out of PARK, or to
STARTING AND OPERATING 343
shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds (refer to "Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System" in this section). To shift past multiple gear ranges at once (such as PARK to DRIVE), simply rotate the gear selector to the appropriate detent. Select the DRIVE range for normal driving.
Standard Shifter
The standard transmission gear selector has PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and LOW shift positions. Using the LOW position manually downshifts the transmission to a lower gear based on vehicle speed.
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
5
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting between these gears.
Gear Selector
344 STARTING AND OPERATING
Premium Shifter With AutoStick
PARK (P)
The premium transmission gear selector provides PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and SPORT shift positions. Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick shift control (shift paddles mounted on the steering wheel). Pressing the shift paddles (-/+) while in the DRIVE or SPORT position will manually select the transmission gear, and will display the current gear in the instrument cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc. Refer to "AutoStick" in this section for further information.
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range.
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission. The engine can be started in this range. Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is especially important when the engine is cold.
WARNING!
· Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
· Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not in PARK. Make sure the transmission is in PARK before leaving the vehicle.
· It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 345
WARNING! (Continued) · Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, turn the engine OFF, and remove the key fob. When the ignition is in the OFF position, the transmis- 5 sion is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement. · When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle. · Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be
(Continued)
346 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector. · Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to children), and do not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
NOTE:
The following indicator should be used to ensure that you have engaged the transmission into the PARK position:
· With brake pedal released, look at the transmission gear position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position (P).
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
· Before moving the transmission gear selector out of PARK, you must start the engine and also press the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector could result.
· DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can damage the drivetrain.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running. Apply the parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission damage. Refer to "Recreational Towing" in "Starting And Operating" and "Towing A Disabled Vehicle" in "What To Do In Emergencies" for further information.
DRIVE (D)
STARTING AND OPERATING 347
This range should be used for most city and highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
5 When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while towing heavy trailers), use the AutoStick shift control (if equipped; refer to AutoStick in this section for further information) to select a lower gear. Under these conditions, using a lower gear will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
348 STARTING AND OPERATING
During extremely cold temperatures (-22°F [-30°C] or below), transmission operation may be modified depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle speed. Normal operation will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.
SPORT (S) -- If Equipped
This mode alters the transmission's automatic shift schedule for sportier driving. Upshift speeds are increased to make full use of available engine power. To access SPORT mode, push down on the gear selector and rotate it fully clockwise, or press the SPORT button in the center stack.
Sport Mode -- If Equipped
Your vehicle is equipped with a Sport Mode feature. This mode is a configuration set up for typical enthusiast driving. The engine, transmission and steering systems are all set to their SPORT settings. Sport Mode will provide improved throttle response and modified shifting for an enhanced driving experience, as well the greatest amount of steering feel. This mode may be activated and deactivated by pushing the Sport button on the instrument panel switch bank.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
LOW (L) -- If Equipped
Use this range for engine braking when descending very steep grades. In this range, the transmission will downshift for increased engine braking. To access the LOW position, push down on the gear selector and rotate it fully clockwise.
Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may operate only in certain gears, or may not shift at all. Vehicle performance may be severely degraded and the engine may stall. In some situations, the transmission
may not re-engage if the engine is turned off and restarted. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. A message in the instrument cluster will inform the driver of the more serious conditions, and indicate what actions may be necessary.
STARTING AND OPERATING 349
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the engine turns OFF.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission 6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
following steps:
operation.
5
NOTE: In cases where the instrument cluster message indicates the transmission may not re-engage after engine shutdown, perform this procedure only in a desired location (preferably, at your authorized dealer).
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not, shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer service is required.
350 STARTING AND OPERATING
AUTOSTICK -- IF EQUIPPED
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature providing manual shift control, giving you more control of the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and improve overall vehicle performance. This system can also provide you with more control during passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, trailer towing, and many other situations.
Operation
When the transmission is in DRIVE or SPORT mode, it will operate automatically, shifting between the eight available gears. To engage AutoStick, simply tap one of the steering wheel-mounted shift paddles (+/-) while in DRIVE or SPORT mode. In DRIVE mode, this will activate a temporary AutoStick mode. The transmission will revert back to normal operation after a period of time, depending on accelerator pedal activity. When the
transmission gear selector is in the SPORT position, tapping either shift paddle will activate permanent AutoStick mode. The transmission will remain in AutoStick mode until the driver deliberately disables AutoStick (as described below). Tapping (-) to enter AutoStick will downshift the transmission to the next lower gear, while using (+) to enter AutoStick will retain the current gear. When AutoStick is active, the current transmission gear is displayed in the instrument cluster.
In AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift up or down when (+/-) is manually selected by the driver, unless an engine lugging or overspeed condition would result. It will remain in the selected gear until another upshift or downshift is chosen, except as described below.
· If AutoStick is engaged while in DRIVE mode, the transmission will automatically shift up when maximum engine speed is reached. If the accelerator is fully
depressed, the transmission will downshift when possible (based on current vehicle speed and gear). Lack of accelerator pedal activity will cause the transmission to revert to automatic operation.
STARTING AND OPERATING 351
· You can start out, from a stop, in first or second gear. Tapping (+) at a stop will allow starting in second gear. Starting out in second gear can be helpful in snowy or icy conditions.
· If AutoStick is engaged while the transmission gear · If a requested downshift would cause the engine to
selector is in the SPORT position, manual gear selec- over-speed, that shift will not occur.
tion will be maintained until the gear selector is returned to DRIVE, or as described below. The transmission will not upshift automatically at redline in this
· The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of a vehicle speed.
5
mode, nor will downshifts be obtained if the accelera- · Holding the (-) paddle depressed will downshift the
tor pedal is pressed to the floor.
transmission to the lowest gear possible at the current
· In either DRIVE or SPORT mode, the transmission will speed.
automatically downshift as the vehicle slows (to pre- · Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
vent engine lugging) and will display the current gear. AutoStick is engaged.
· The transmission will automatically downshift to first gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the vehicle is accelerated.
· The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a fault or overheat condition is detected.
352 STARTING AND OPERATING
To disengage AutoStick mode, press and hold the (+) shift paddle until D or S is once again indicated in the instrument cluster. Shifting out of SPORT mode will also disable AutoStick. You can shift in or out of AutoStick mode at any time without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or personal injury.
ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) -- IF EQUIPPED
This vehicle is equipped with an active on-demand All-Wheel Drive (AWD) system which makes available optimum traction for a wide variety of road surface and driving conditions. The system minimizes wheel slip by automatically redirecting torque to the front and rear wheels as necessary.
To maximize fuel economy, your AWD vehicle automatically defaults to rear-wheel drive (RWD) when road and environmental conditions are such that wheel slip is unlikely to occur. When specific road and environmental conditions require increased levels of road traction, the vehicle automatically shifts into AWD mode. Automatic AWD operation could be activated by outside temperature, wheel slip, or other predetermined conditions (there may be a slight delay for AWD engagement after a wheel slip condition occurs). AWD can also be manually selected by activating AutoStick mode (+/-), engaging
STARTING AND OPERATING 353
Sport Mode or activating the windshield wipers for an DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
extended period of time. Drive mode, RWD or AWD, can be found in the Driver Information Display (DID). Refer
Acceleration
to "Driver Information Display (DID)" in "Understand- Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip-
ing Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull
erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs
NOTE: If the "SERVICE AWD SYSTEM" warning mes- when there is a difference in the surface traction under
sage appears after engine start up, or during driving, it the rear (driving) wheels. means that the AWD system is not functioning properly
5
and that service is required. Refer to "Driver Information Display (DID)" in "Understanding Your Instrument
WARNING!
Panel" for further information.
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear
CAUTION!
wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and
All wheels must have the same size and type tires. Unequal tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire size may cause failure of the front differential and/or
possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction (ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.).
the transfer case.
354 STARTING AND OPERATING
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precautions should be observed:
· Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are slushy.
· Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Limited Slip Differential (LSD) that reduces, but does not eliminate, the amount of wheel slip across a given axle for improved handling.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/ centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
· Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become visible.
· Keep tires properly inflated.
· Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop.
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road or path's surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water. Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 355
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
distances. Therefore, after driving through stand-
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
ing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
Shallow Standing Water
· Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your pas-
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through sengers, and others around you.
5
shallow standing water, consider the following Cautions
and Warnings before doing so.
CAUTION!
WARNING!
· Driving through standing water limits your vehicle's traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
· Driving through standing water limits your vehicle's braking capabilities, which increases stopping
· Always check the depth of the standing water before driving through it. Never drive through standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
· Determine the condition of the road or the path that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing water.
(Continued)
(Continued)
356 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued) · Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave effects. · Driving through standing water may cause damage to your vehicle's drivetrain components. Always inspect your vehicle's fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after driving through standing water. Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this may result in further damage. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. · Getting water inside your vehicle's engine can cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING
The electric power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide light efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If the electric steering system experiences a fault that prevents it from providing assist, you will still have the ability to steer the vehicle manually.
Alternate electric power steering efforts can be selected through the Uconnect® System. Refer to "Customer Programmable Features" or "Performance Control -- If Equipped" within "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
STARTING AND OPERATING 357
NOTE:
· Even if the power steering assistance is no longer operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under these conditions there will be a substantial increase in steering effort, especially at low speeds and during parking maneuvers.
If the Steering icon is displayed and the "SERVICE POWER STEERING" or the "POWER
· If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for service.
5
STEERING ASSIST OFF SERVICE SYSTEM" message is displayed within the Driver Infor- FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ENGINE ONLY -- mation Display (DID), this indicates the vehicle needs to IF EQUIPPED
be taken to the dealer for service. Refer to "Driver This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting
Information Display (DID)" in "Understanding Your off four of the engine's eight cylinders during light load
Instrument Panel" for further information.
and cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no
driver inputs or additional driving skills required.
NOTE: This system may take some time to return to full functionality after a battery disconnect.
358 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking brake is fully applied and place the shift lever/gear selector in the PARK position.
The foot operated parking brake is located below the lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the park brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To release the parking brake, press the park brake pedal a second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake disengage.
Parking Brake When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON position, the "Brake Warning Light" in the instrument cluster will illuminate.
NOTE:
· When the parking brake is applied and the transmission is placed in gear, the "Brake Warning Light" will flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake before attempting to move the vehicle.
· This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever/gear selector in PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever/gear selector out of PARK. The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 359
WARNING!
· Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle move-
ment and possible injury or damage.
· When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
5
· Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever/gear selector.
· Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
(Continued)
360 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
Keyless Enter-N-GoTM in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. · Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision. · Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the "Brake Warning Light" remains on with the parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
CAUTION! (Continued) is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems loses normal capability, the remaining system will still function. There will be some loss of overall braking effectiveness. This may be evident by increased pedal travel during application, greater pedal force required to slow or stop, and potential activation of the "Brake Warning Light".
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (for example, repeated brake applications with the engine
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 361
OFF) the brakes will still function. The effort required to Also, your vehicle may be equipped with Hill Start Assist
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required (HSA), Ready Alert Braking, and Rain Brake Support.
with the power system operating.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a high perfor- The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
mance braking system. The brake pads are a semi- vehicle stability and brake performance under most
metallic compound, which offer superior fade resistance braking conditions. The system automatically "pumps"
for consistent operation. A compromise to using this type of brake pad is that the brakes may produce more brake
the brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent wheel lock-up.
5
dust and may squeal slightly under certain weather and
operating conditions (i.e., during light brake applica- The Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) prevents
tions) this is considered normal conditions.
the rear wheels from over-braking and provides greater
control of available braking forces applied to the rear
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
axle.
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic brake control system that include Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Traction Control System (TCS), Brake Assist System (BAS), and the Electronic Stability Control (ESC). All four of these systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions.
When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some related motor noises. These noises are the system performing its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS is working properly. This self check occurs each time the vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h).
362 STARTING AND OPERATING
ABS is activated during braking under certain road or stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can include ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or panic stops.
You also may experience the following when the brake system goes into Anti-Lock: · The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop).
· The clicking sound of solenoid valves.
· Brake pedal pulsations.
· A slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end of the stop.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING!
· The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment. This interference can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals.
· Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 363
WARNING! (Continued)
Traction Control System (TCS)
· The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each driven wheel. If wheel spin is detected, brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability.
the traction afforded. · The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
A feature of the TCS system, Brake Limited Differential
(BLD), controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other,
5
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel.
· The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous wheel that is not spinning. This feature remains active
manner that could jeopardize the user's safety or even if TCS and ESC are in the "Sport Mode (Partial Off)"
the safety of others.
or Track Mode (Full Off) mode. Refer to "Electronic
Stability Control (ESC)" in this section for more informaAll vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and tion. type and tires must be properly inflated to produce
accurate signals for the computer.
364 STARTING AND OPERATING
Brake Assist System (BAS)
This system complements the ABS by optimizing the vehicle braking capability during emergency brake maneuvers. This system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce braking distances.
Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefits of this system, you must apply continuous brake pedal pressure during the stopping sequence. Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.
STARTING AND OPERATING 365
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
· Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
This system enhances directional control and stability of appropriate for the steering wheel position.
the vehicle under various driving conditions. The ESC corrects for oversteering and understeering the vehicle
WARNING!
by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel. Engine The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot pre-
power may also be reduced to assist in counteracting the vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the
condition of oversteer or understeer and help the vehicle vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
maintain the desired path.
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all 5
The ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the path accidents, including those resulting from excessive
that the driver intends to steer the vehicle and compares speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent collisions
does not match the intended path, the ESC applies the resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappro-
brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting priate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe,
the condition of oversteer or understeer.
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
· Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety
of others.
366 STARTING AND OPERATING
ESC Operating Modes
The ESC system has two or three available operating modes:
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this mode. This mode should be used for most driving conditions. The ESC should only be turned OFF for specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
The "Partial Off" mode is intended for times when a more spirited driving experience is desired. It is also intended for driving in deep snow, sand, or gravel. This mode disables the TCS portion of the ESC and raises the threshold for ESC activation, which allows for more wheel spin than what ESC normally allows.
The "ESC Off" switch is located on the switch bank in the center of the instrument panel. To enter the "Partial Off" mode, momentarily push the "ESC Off" switch and the ESC off indicator light will illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push the "ESC Off" switch and the ESC off indicator light will turn off.
WARNING!
· When in "Partial Off" mode, the TCS functionality of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section), has been disabled and the "ESC Off Indicator Light" will be illuminated. When in "Partial Off" mode, the engine power reduction feature of TCS is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is reduced.
· Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled when the ESC system is in the "Partial Off" mode.
STARTING AND OPERATING 367
NOTE:
Full Off -- If Equipped
· To improve the vehicle's traction when driving with This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use
snow chains, or when starting off in deep snow, sand, only and should not be used on any public roadways. In
or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the "Partial this mode, all TCS and ESC stability features are turned
Off" mode by momentarily pushing the "ESC Off" OFF. To enter the "Full Off" mode, push and hold the
switch. Once the situation requiring "Partial Off" "ESC Off" switch for five seconds while the vehicle is
mode is overcome, turn the ESC on again by momen- stopped with the engine running. After five seconds, a
tarily pushing the "ESC Off" switch. This may be done chime will sound, the ESC Off Indicator Lamp will 5
while the vehicle is in motion.
illuminate, and the "ESC off" message may appear in the
· When in "Partial Off" mode, the TCS functionality of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section), has been disabled and the "ESC Off Indicator Light" will be illuminated. All other stability
Driver Information Display (DID). Refer to "Driver Information Display (DID)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information. To turn ESC ON again, momentarily push the "ESC Off" switch.
features of ESC function normally. When in "Partial
Off" mode, the engine power reduction feature of TCS
is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered
by the ESC system is reduced.
368 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
In the ESC "Full Off" mode, the engine torque reduction and stability features are disabled. Therefore, the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESC is unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not engage to assist in maintaining stability. ESC Off mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use only.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
system will release brake pressure in proportion to the amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in the intended direction of travel.
HSA Activation Criteria
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to activate:
· Vehicle must be stopped.
· Vehicle must be on a 6% (approximate) grade or greater hill.
The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle during this short period of time, the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The
· Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
HSA will work in REVERSE and all forward gears when the activation criteria have been met. The system will not activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL or PARK.
STARTING AND OPERATING 369
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
There may be situations on minor hills with a loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer, when the system will not activate and slight rolling may occur. This could cause a collision with another vehicle or object. Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
brake pedal is released, there may not be enough brake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer on a hill and this could cause a collision with another vehicle or object behind you. In order to avoid rolling down the hill while resuming acceleration, manually activate the trailer brake prior to releasing the brake pedal. Always remember the driver is 5
Towing With HSA
HSA will provide assistance when starting on a grade when pulling a trailer.
responsible for braking the vehicle. · HSA is not a parking brake. If you stop the vehicle
on a hill without putting the transmission in PARK
and using the parking brake, it will roll down the
WARNING!
hill and could cause a collision with another vehicle or object. Always remember to use the park-
· If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer, your trailer brakes may be activated and
ing brake while parking on a hill, and that the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, when the
(Continued)
370 STARTING AND OPERATING
HSA Off
Rain Brake Support
If you wish to turn off the HSA system, it can be done in the Uconnect® Settings. Refer to Uconnect® Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information.
Ready Alert Braking
Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to reach full braking during emergency braking situations. It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by the driver. When the throttle is released very quickly, Ready Alert Braking applies a small amount of brake pressure. This brake pressure will not be noticed by the driver. The brake system uses this brake pressure to allow a fast brake response if the driver applies the brakes.
Rain Brake Support may improve braking performance in wet conditions. It will periodically apply a small amount of brake pressure to remove any water buildup on the front brake rotors. It only functions when the windshield wipers are in the LO or HI mode, it does not function in the intermittent mode. When Rain Brake Support is active, there is no notification to the driver and no driver interaction is required.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light
The "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is cycled to the ON position. It should go out with the engine running. If the "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" comes on continuously with the engine running, a
STARTING AND OPERATING 371
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this · The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your autho- that caused the ESC activation.
rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
The "ESC OFF Indicator Light" indicates the
The "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" (located in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is partially
off or full off.
5
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. Synchronizing ESC The "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" also
flashes when TCS is active. If the "ESC Activation/ Malfunction Indicator Light" begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions.
If the power supply is interrupted (battery disconnected or discharged), the "ESC Activation/ Malfunction Indicator Light" may illuminate with the engine running. If this should occur, turn the steering wheel completely to the left and then to
NOTE:
the right. The "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
· Each time the ignition is cycled ON, the ESC system will be ON even if it was cycled off previously.
Light" should go out. However, if the light remains on, have the ESC and BAS checked at your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
372 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings
1 -- U.S. DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN) 2 -- Size Designation 3 -- Service Description
4 -- Maximum Load
5 -- Maximum Pressure 6 -- Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades
NOTE:
· P (Passenger) -- Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter "P" molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
· European -- Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards. Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width. The letter P is absent from this tire size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
· LT (Light Truck) -- Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters "LT" that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
· Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emergency use only. Temporary high pressure compact spare tires have the letter "T" or "S" molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
STARTING AND OPERATING 373
· High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
5
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
....blank.... = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
374 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE: 65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or 10.5 = Section width in inches (in) R = Construction code
R means radial construction, or D means diagonal or bias construction 15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in) Service Description: 95 = Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
STARTING AND OPERATING 375
EXAMPLE:
H = Speed Symbol
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
5
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL)
tire:
· XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
· LL = Light load tire or
· C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
376 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits) L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits) ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits) 03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
03 means the 3rd week
STARTING AND OPERATING 377
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
01 means the year 2001
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Terminology And Definitions
5
Term B-Pillar
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
378 STARTING AND OPERATING
Term Maximum Inflation Pressure
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Tire Placard
Definition
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard.
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle's loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver's side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver's side door.
STARTING AND OPERATING 379
5 Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
380 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard This placard tells you important information about the: 1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle. 2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
STARTING AND OPERATING 381
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare tires.
vehicle, locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg" on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
Loading
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You the weight referenced here.
will not exceed the tire's load carrying capacity if you Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
5
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the "Vehicle Loading" section of this manual.
1. Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg" on your vehicle's placard.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pasGAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg. "Vehicle Loading" in this section.
382 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if "XXX" amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 lbs (68 kg) = 750 lbs (340 kg), and 1400 lbs (635 kg) 750 lbs (340 kg) = 650 lbs [295 kg]).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.
NOTE:
· If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
· For the following example, the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).
STARTING AND OPERATING 383
5
384 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.
TIRES -- GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure: · Safety and Vehicle Stability · Economy
· Tread Wear
· Ride Comfort
Safety
WARNING!
· Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions.
· Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in overheating and tire failure.
· Over-inflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire failure.
· Overinflated or under-inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 385
WARNING! (Continued)
Fuel Economy
· Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle. · Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left. · Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnor-
mal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the
need for earlier tire replacement.
5
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
· Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause erratic and unpredictable steering response.
· Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride. Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver's side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver's side door.
386 STARTING AND OPERATING
At least once a month:
· Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires may look properly inflated even when they are underinflated.
· Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always "cold tire inflation pressure". Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside temperature condition.
STARTING AND OPERATING 387
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
WARNING!
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi- maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high 75 mph (120 km/h). speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
5
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle Radial Ply Tires
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera-
tion. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original
WARNING!
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operat-
ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Al-
ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
combine them with other types of tires.
388 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Repair
Tire Types
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it meets the following criteria:
· The tire has not been driven on when flat.
· The damage is only on the tread section of your tire (sidewall damage is not repairable).
· The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and additional information.
All Season Tires -- If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring, Summer, Fall and Winter). Traction levels may vary between different all season tires. All season tires can be identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires -- If Equipped
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are covered with ice or snow. For more information, contact an authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 389
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a "mountain/snowflake" symbol on the tire sidewall.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the possibility of loss of vehicle control.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the origi-
nal equipment tires. Use snow tires only in sets of four; failure to do so
5
may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
390 STARTING AND OPERATING
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked before using these tire types.
Spare Tires -- If Equipped
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead of a spare tire, please refer to "Tire Service Kit" in "What To Do In Emergencies" for further information.
Run Flat Tires -- If Equipped
CAUTION!
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more information.
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a compact or limited-use temporary spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may result.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel -- If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel equivalent in look and function to the original equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire
STARTING AND OPERATING 391
rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
tire rotation pattern.
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Compact Spare Tire -- If Equipped
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
WARNING!
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
5
driver's side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. only. With these spares, do not drive more than
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter "T" 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
or "S" preceding the size designation. Example: T145/ tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
80D18 103M.
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equip- spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Full Size Spare -- If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
392 STARTING AND OPERATING
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
Limited-Use Spare -- If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver's side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver's side door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.
Refer to "Freeing A Stuck Vehicle" in "What To Do In Emergencies" for further information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 393
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
one. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than
5
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continu-
ously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced.
1 -- Worn Tire 2 -- New Tire
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an inch (2 mm). When the tread is
394 STARTING AND OPERATING
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced. Refer to "Replacement Tires" in this section for further information.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including, but not limited to:
· Driving style.
· Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
· Distance driven.
· Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle maintenance schedule is highly recommended.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on "Tread Wear Indicator". Refer to the Tire and Loading
Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety Information section of this manual for more information relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicle's handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make sure that the wheel's specifications match those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 395
WARNING!
· Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict- 5 able handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle.
· Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity, other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose control and have a collision.
(Continued)
396 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued) · Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
· Install on Rear Tires Only.
· Due to limited clearance for a Rear Wheel Drive (RWD) vehicle, on P215/65R17, P225/60R18 and P235/55R18 tires with a Security Chain Company (SCC) Super Z6 low profile traction device or equivalent is recommended.
· Due to limited clearance for an All Wheel Drive (AWD) vehicle, P245/45R20 tire with the use of a traction device that meets the SAE type "Class S" specification is recommended.
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard against damage.
· Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
· No other tire sizes are recommended for use with a tire chain or traction device.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow) between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
STARTING AND OPERATING 397
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the following precautions: · Because of restricted traction device clearance be-
tween tires and other suspension components, it is important that only traction devices in good condition are used. Broken devices can cause serious damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove the damaged parts of the device before further use. · Install device as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km). · Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h). · Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle. · Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement.
CAUTION! (Continued) · Observe the traction device manufacturer's instruc-
tions on the method of installation, operating speed, and conditions for use. Always use the suggested operating speed of the device manufacturer's if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h). · Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
5
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering, driving, and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
(Continued)
398 STARTING AND OPERATING
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" for the proper maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
The suggested rotation method is the "forward cross" shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern does not apply to some directional tires that must not be reversed.
Tire Rotation
STARTING AND OPERATING 399
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom- limit for any reason, including low temperature effects
mended cold placard pressure.
and natural pressure loss through the tire.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
(7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warn-
5
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure ing (Tire Pressure Monitoring [TPM] Telltale Light) illu-
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three minates, you must increase the tire pressure to the
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour recommended cold placard pressure in order for the TPM
period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the Telltale Light to turn off. The system will automatically
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall. update and the TPM Telltale Light will turn off once the
Refer to "Tires General Information" in "Starting And system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle
Operating" for information on how to properly inflate the may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
vehicle's tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this informa-
vehicle is driven - this is normal and there should be no tion.
adjustment for this increased pressure.
400 STARTING AND OPERATING
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the TPM Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the TPM Telltale Light will still be ON. In this situation, the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle's recommended cold placard pressure value.
CAUTION!
· The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
CAUTION! (Continued)
warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to your local dealer to have your sensor function checked. · After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the TPM sensor.
(Continued)
NOTE:
· The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition.
STARTING AND OPERATING 401
· Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire.
Base System
· The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
while adjusting your tire pressure.
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
· Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure
5
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. readings to the receiver module.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
stopping ability.
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
· The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte- and to maintain the proper pressure. nance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain The TPMS consists of the following components:
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure · Receiver module
gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPM Telltale Light.
· Four TPM sensors
· TPM Telltale Light
402 STARTING AND OPERATING
The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly (if equipped) has a TPM sensor. The matching full size spare can be used in place of any of the four road tires. The TPMS will only monitor the pressure in the full size spare when it is used in place of a road tire. Otherwise, a spare with a pressure below the low-pressure limit will not cause the TPM Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The TPM Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster, a LOW TIRE message will be displayed and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires. An Inflate to XX message will also be displayed. Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible, check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire to the vehicle's recommended cold placard
pressure value as shown in the Inflate to XX message. Once the system receives the updated tire pressures, the system will automatically update and the TPM Telltale Light and LOW TIRE message will turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
Service TPMS Warning
If a system fault is detected, the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will also sound a chime. If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. The TPM Telltale Light will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists. A system fault can occur due to any of the following:
1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors.
STARTING AND OPERATING 403
2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains 3. Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
materials that may block radio wave signals.
(24 km/h) will turn off the TPM Telltale Light and
3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
LOW TIRE message as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
Vehicles With Compact Spare
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors. 1. The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor. 5
Vehicles With Full Size Spare
Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in
1. The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly the compact spare tire.
has a TPM sensor that can be monitored by the TPMS. 2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
2. If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light and LOW TIRE message will turn ON. The Inflate to XX message
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light and LOW TIRE message will turn ON. The Inflate to XX message will also be displayed.
will also be displayed.
404 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the LOW TIRE message will turn off and the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare, the TPMS will update automatically and the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF, as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
Premium System -- If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
· Receiver module
· Four TPM sensors
· Various TPMS messages, which display in the Driver Information Display (DID)
· TPM Telltale Light
The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly (if equipped) has a TPM sensor. The full size spare can be used in place of any of the four road tires. The TPMS will only monitor the pressure in the full size spare tire when it is used in place of a road tire. Otherwise, a spare with a pressure below the low-pressure limit will not cause the TPM Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
STARTING AND OPERATING 405
5
The TPM Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires. In addition, the DID will display a LOW TIRE message and a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure values flashing or changing color. An Inflate to XX message will also be displayed.
Tire Pressure Monitor Display
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the tires with a low pressure condition (those flashing or in a different color in the DID graphic) to the vehicle's recommended cold placard pressure inflation value as shown in the Inflate to XX message. Once the system receives the updated tire pressures, the system
406 STARTING AND OPERATING
will automatically update, the graphic display in the DID will stop flashing or change color back to the original color, and the TPM Telltale Light will turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
Service TPMS Warning
If a system fault is detected, the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the DID will display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being received.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no longer exists, the TPM Telltale Light will no longer flash, and the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message will no longer display, and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the following:
Low Tire Pressure Monitor Display
1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors.
STARTING AND OPERATING 407
2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains Vehicles With Full Size Spare
materials that may block radio wave signals.
1. The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly
3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or has a TPM sensor that can be monitored by the TPMS.
wheel housings.
2. If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors. The DID will also display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM
limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light will turn ON. In 5 addition, the DID will display a low pressure message
message for a minimum of five seconds when a system and a graphic showing the low tire pressure value
fault related to an incorrect sensor location fault is flashing or in a different color. An Inflate to XX
detected. In this case, the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message will also be displayed.
message is then followed with a graphic display with pressure values still shown. This indicates that the pressure values are still being received from the TPM sensors but they may not be located in the correct vehicle position. The system still needs to be serviced as long as the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message is displayed.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF, and the pressure value displayed will be updated and stop flashing or return to its original color as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires.
408 STARTING AND OPERATING
Vehicles With Compact Spare
1. The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the TPM Telltale Light will remain ON and a chime will sound. In addition, the graphic in the DID will still display a flashing pressure value or a pressure value in a different color. An Inflate to XX message will also be displayed.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In addition, the DID will display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will sound, the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the DID will display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare, the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF and the graphic in the DID will display a new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
General Information
STARTING AND OPERATING 409
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and 3.6L Engine -- If Equipped
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions: · This device may not cause harmful interference.
This engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excellent
· This device must accept any interference received,
fuel economy and performance when us-
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
ing high-quality unleaded "Regular" gasoline having an octane rating of 87 as speci-
5
fied by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of higher octane
The TPM sensors are regulated under one of the follow- "Premium" gasoline will not provide any benefit over
ing licenses:
"Regular" gasoline in these engines.
United States Canada
MRXMERCTX1 2546A-MERCTX1
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of 87, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use of gasoline with an octane number lower than 87 can cause engine failure and may void or not be covered by the New Vehicle Warranty.
410 STARTING AND OPERATING
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.
5.7L Engine -- If Equipped
This engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide satisfactory fuel economy and performance when using highquality unleaded gasoline having an octane range of 87 to 89 as specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of 89 octane "Plus" gasoline is recommended for optimum performance and fuel economy.
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of 87, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use
of gasoline with an octane number lower than 87 can cause engine failure and may void or not be covered by the New Vehicle Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as "Reformulated Gasoline". Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide improved performance and durability of engine and fuel system components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
STARTING AND OPERATING 411
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as ethanol.
CAUTION!
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline containing up to 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting and drivability problems, damage critical fuel system components, cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or cause the "Malfunction Indicator Light" to illuminate. Please observe pump labels as they should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than 10% ethanol.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms: 5 · Operate in a lean mode.
· OBD II "Malfunction Indicator Light" on.
· Poor engine performance.
· Poor cold start and cold drivability.
· Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
Problems that result from using gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% ethanol are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
412 STARTING AND OPERATING
MMT In Gasoline
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT) is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump, therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline.
Materials Added To Fuel
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions
and they would result in additional cost. Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle's performance: · The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system. · An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 413
CAUTION! (Continued)
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
· The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or not be covered
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly. Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning: · Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can 5
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle. · Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main-
tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
(Continued)
414 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued) time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side windows fully open.
FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) -- IF EQUIPPED
E-85 General Information
The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel vehicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a unique fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Unleaded Gasoline Only. This section only covers those subjects that are unique to these vehicles. Please refer to the other sections of this manual for information on features that are common between Flexible Fuel and gasoline-only powered vehicles.
CAUTION!
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label can operate on E-85.
Ethanol Fuel (E-85)
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline.
WARNING!
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could cause serious personal injury. Never have any smoking materials lit or products that can cause spark in or near the vehicle when removing the fuel filler tube cap (gas cap) or filling the tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning agent and never use it near an open flame.
Fuel Requirements
NOTE:
STARTING AND OPERATING 415
If your vehicle is E-85 compatible, it will operate on · Use seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel (ASTM D5798). With
unleaded gasoline with any octane rating, or solely E-85 non-seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel, hard starting and
fuel, or any mixture of these fuels.
rough idle following start up may be experienced even
For best results, avoid fueling patterns alternating between E-85 and unleaded gasoline.
if the above recommendations are followed, especially when the ambient temperature is below 32°F (0°C).
When switching fuel types: · Add 5 gallons (19 Liters) or more when refueling.
· Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully 5 compatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be
· Drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at least 5 miles (8 km).
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard starting and/or driveability problems during warm up.
caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline additive, such as MOPAR® Injector Cleanup or Techron may be used.
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles (E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles
FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formulated engine oils. These special requirements are included in MOPAR® engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting
416 STARTING AND OPERATING
Chrysler Specification MS-6395. It is recommended that engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Material Standard MS-6395 be used. MS-6395 contains additional requirements, developed during extensive fleet testing, to provide additional protection to FCA US LLC engines.
Starting
The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), an increase in the time it takes for your engine to start may be experienced, and a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations) until the engine is fully warmed up. These issues may be improved with the use of seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel.
NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) may improve engine start time when using E-85 fuel when the ambient temperature is less than 32°F (0°C).
Cruising Range
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter than gasoline, an increase in fuel consumption will be experienced. The miles per gallon (mpg)/kilometers per liter and the driving range will decrease by approximately 30%, compared to gasoline operation.
Replacement Parts
All fuel and engine components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) are designed to be compatible with ethanol. Ethanol compatible service components are required.
CAUTION!
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol compatible components can damage your vehicle.
Maintenance
STARTING AND OPERATING 417
CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and may affect drivability.
ADDING FUEL
5
1. Press the fuel filler door release switch (located in the driver's door map pocket).
Fuel Filler Door Release Switch 2. Open the fuel filler door.
418 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. There is no fuel filler cap. A flapper door inside the pipe seals the system.
4. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe the nozzle opens and holds the flapper door while refueling.
NOTE: Only the correct size nozzle opens the latches allowing the flapper door to open.
5. Fill the vehicle with fuel when the fuel nozzle "clicks" or shuts off the fuel tank is full.
Fuel Filler Door
NOTE: In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the fuel door to break the ice buildup and re-release the fuel door using the inside release button. Do not pry on the door.
6. Maintain nozzle in filler for 5 seconds to allow nozzle to drain.
7. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door.
NOTE: A funnel is provided (located in the trunk in the spare tire area) to open the flapper door to allow for emergency refueling with a gas can.
Fuel Funnel
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not "top off" the fuel tank after filling.
STARTING AND OPERATING 419
WARNING!
· Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is being filled.
· Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and may cause the "Malfunction Indicator 5 Light" to turn on.
· A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be burned. Always place fuel containers on the ground while filling.
420 STARTING AND OPERATING
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release
If you are unable to open the fuel filler door, use the fuel filler door emergency release.
1. Open the trunk.
2. Remove the access cover (located on the left side inner trim panel).
Access Cover
3. Pull the release cable. Release Cable
VEHICLE LOADING
STARTING AND OPERATING 421
The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on the "Vehicle Certification Label". This information should be used for passenger and luggage loading as indicated.
Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
5
Vehicle Certification Label
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to the drivers side B-Pillar or the rear of the driver's door.
The label contains the following information: · Name of manufacturer · Month and year of manufacture · Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) · Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
422 STARTING AND OPERATING
· Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear · Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) · Type of Vehicle · Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR.
WARNING!
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Overloading
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires, wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the front and rear GAWR.
The best way to figure out the total weight of your vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that it is not over the GVWR.
STARTING AND OPERATING 423
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle NOTE:
separately. It is important that you distribute the load evenly over the front and rear axles.
· Refer to the "Vehicle Certification Label" affixed to the rear of the driver's door for your vehicle's GVWR and
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and GAWRs.
shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension components do not necessarily increase the vehicle's
· Refer to the "Tire Placard" for your vehicle's proper
GVWR.
tire pressure.
Loading
TRAILER TOWING
5
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items down low and be sure you distribute their weight as evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight. Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate.
In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage, follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
424 STARTING AND OPERATING
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR. Refer to "Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label" in "Starting And Operating" for further information.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR. Refer to "Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label" in "Starting And Operating" for further information.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision.
STARTING AND OPERATING 425
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.
Tongue Weight (TW)
Weight-Carrying Hitch
5
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
hitch ball by the trailer. The recommended tongue weight weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
is 10% to 15% of the vehicle's GTW for a conventional some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds
hitch. You must consider this as part of the load on your of hitches are the most popular on the market today and
vehicle.
they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized
Frontal Area
trailers.
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the maximum width of the front of a trailer.
426 STARTING AND OPERATING
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle's front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in accordance with the manufacturer's directions, it provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle and trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
· An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch system may reduce handling, stability, braking performance, and could result in a collision.
· Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 427
Trailer Hitch Classification
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
The following chart provides the industry standard for correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class
Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty
3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
5
Class III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty
10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Refer to the "Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)" chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
428 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/Transmission
3.6L Automatic 5.7L Automatic
Frontal Area
Max. GTW (Gross Trailer Weight)
22 sq ft (2.04 sq m)
1,000 lbs (454 kg)
32 sq ft (2.97 sq m)
1,000 lbs (454 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
Max. Tongue Weight (See Note)
100 lbs (45 kg) 100 lbs (45 kg)
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and it should never exceed the weight referenced on the "Tire and Loading Information" placard. Refer to "Tire Safety Information" in "Starting and Operating" for further information.
Trailer And Tongue Weight
STARTING AND OPERATING 429
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side
which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
5
many trailer collisions.
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch.
Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle: · The tongue weight of the trailer.
· The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle.
· The weight of the driver and all passengers.
430 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle. Refer to the "Tire And Loading Information" placard for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components the following guidelines are recommended:
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to an injury collision. Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible: · Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and it will not shift during travel. When trailering cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control. You could lose control of your vehicle and have a collision. · When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a loss of control, poor performance, or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chassis structure, or tires.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) · Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners. · Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in PARK. Always, block or chock the trailer wheels. · GCWR must not be exceeded. · Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded:
1. Max loading as defined on the "Tire and Loading Information" placard.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 431
WARNING! (Continued)
2. GTW 3. GAWR 4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized. (This requirement may limit the ability to always achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue weight as a 5 percentage of total trailer weight.)
CAUTION! · Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle or other parts could be damaged. · Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
(Continued)
432 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued) the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
Towing Requirements -- Tires
· Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire.
· Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to "Tires General Information" in "Starting And Operating" for information on tire pressures and for proper tire inflation procedures.
· Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage.
· Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer. Refer to "Tires General
Information" in "Starting And Operating" for information on tread wear indicators and for the proper inspection procedure.
· When replacing tires, refer to "Tires General Information" in "Starting And Operating" for information on replacement tires and for the proper tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle's GVWR and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements -- Trailer Brakes
· Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer. This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury.
· An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically
STARTING AND OPERATING 433
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic brake controller is not required.
· Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of 2,000 lbs (907 kg).
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg) loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
WARNING!
· Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle's hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes when you need them and could have a collision.
· Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance. When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could result in a collision.
Towing Requirements -- Trailer Lights And Wiring 5
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size, stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and sevenpin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring harness.
434 STARTING AND OPERATING
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector. Refer to the following illustrations.
1 -- Female Pins 2 -- Male Pin 3 -- Ground
Four-Pin Connector
4 -- Park 5 -- Left Stop/Turn 6 -- Right Stop/Turn
Seven-Pin Connector
1 -- Battery 2 -- Backup Lamps 3 -- Right Stop/Turn 4 -- Electric Brakes
5 -- Ground 6 -- Left Stop/Turn 7 -- Running Lamps
STARTING AND OPERATING 435
Towing Tips
Electronic Speed Control -- If Equipped
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping, and backing up the trailer in an area located away from heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission
· Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
· When using the speed control, if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until you can get back to cruising speed.
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. The · Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
transmission controls include a drive strategy to avoid maximize fuel efficiency.
5
frequent shifting when towing. However, if frequent shifting does occur while in DRIVE, you can use the AutoStick -- If Equipped
AutoStick shift control (if equipped) to manually select a · When using the AutoStick shift control, select the
lower gear.
highest gear that allows for adequate performance and
NOTE: Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing exces-
avoids frequent downshifts. For example, choose "5" if the desired speed can be maintained. Choose "4" or "3" if needed to maintain the desired speed.
sive shifting and heat buildup. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
436 STARTING AND OPERATING
· To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as necessary to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to a higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road conditions allow.
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating, take the following actions:
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Two-Wheel Drive And All-Wheel Drive
Recreational towing (with all four wheels on the ground, or using a tow dolly) is NOT ALLOWED. The only acceptable method for towing this vehicle (behind another vehicle) is on a vehicle trailer with all four wheels OFF the ground.
City Driving When stopped for short periods of time, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed. Highway Driving Reduce speed.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or transfer case damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . .438 JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .451
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . .438 Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . .455 6
Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440 MANUAL PARK RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . . . . . . . . . .441 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . .460
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . .442 All Wheel Drive (AWD) Models . . . . . . . . . . .462
Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444 Rear-Wheel Drive (RWD) Models . . . . . . . . . .463
Jacking And Changing A Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . .445 Without The Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
438 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the center of the instrument panel between the center air outlets.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flashers. When the switch is activated, all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers may wear down your battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action. · On the highways -- slow down. · In city traffic -- while stopped, place the transmission
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle speed.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition:
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the · If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 439
· You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
WARNING!
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
from the engine cooling system.
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
CAUTION!
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads "H," WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
6
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with
the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
the "H," turn the engine off immediately and call for time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
service.
vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
properly calibrated torque wrench.
440 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque 130 Ft-Lbs (176 N·m)
**Lug Nut/ Bolt Size
M14 x 1.50
Lug Nut/ Bolt Socket
Size
22 mm
**Use only your Authorized Dealer recommended lug nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated against the wheel.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 441
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
Torque Patterns
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury.
WARNING!
· Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel.
· Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You 6 could be crushed. Never put any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift.
· Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack.
· The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
(Continued)
442 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued) lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
2. Lift the access cover using the pull strap.
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage
The jack and spare tire are both stowed under an access cover in the trunk. Follow these steps to access the jack and spare tire.
NOTE: The spare tire must be removed in order to access the jack.
1. Open the trunk.
Opening The Access Panel
3. Remove the fastener securing the spare tire.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 443
Spare Tire Fastener 4. Remove the spare tire.
5. Remove the fastener securing the jack.
6
Jack Fastener 6. Remove the jack and lug wrench assembly from under
the spare tire. Turn the jack screw to the left to loosen the lug wrench, and remove the wrench from the jack assembly.
444 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immediately.
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery areas.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Place the shift lever/gear selector into PARK.
5. Turn OFF the ignition.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite of the jacking position. For example, if changing the right front tire, block the left rear wheel.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking And Changing A Tire
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle: · Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle. · Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher. · Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised. · Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in REVERSE. · Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack.
(Continued)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 445
WARNING! (Continued) · Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack. · Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift. · Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change. · If working on or near a roadway, be extremely 6 careful of motor traffic.
Jack Warning Label
446 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated in the Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and lug wrench.
2. If equipped with aluminum wheels where the center cap covers the lug nuts, use the lug wrench to pry the center cap off carefully before raising the vehicle.
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the lug wrench to loosen, but not remove, the lug nuts on the wheel with the flat tire. Turn the lug nuts counterclockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the ground.
Jacking Locations
4. Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to the flat tire. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill flange.
NOTE: If the vehicle is too low for jack placement, slide the jack on its side and rotate it up into position.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 447
Front Jacking Location
6
Rear Jacking Location 5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire
and install the spare tire.
448 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire.
6. Remove the lug nuts and tire. 7. Mount the spare tire.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
Mounting Spare Tire
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 449
NOTE:
9. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
· For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to install a handle counterclockwise.
center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare. 10. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
· Refer to "Compact Spare Tire" and to "Limited-Use
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
Spare" under "Tires--General Information" in
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until
"Starting and Operating" for additional warnings,
each nut has been tightened twice. For the correct lug
cautions, and information about the spare tire, its
nut torque refer to Torque Specifications in this
use, and operation.
section. If in doubt about the correct tightness, have
8. Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the lug
them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station.
6
nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
11. Stow the jack, tools and flat tire. Make sure the base
WARNING!
of the jack faces the front of the vehicle before tightening down the fastener.
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
450 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immediately.
Road Tire Installation
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
4. Refer to Torque Table for proper lug nut torque.
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped 5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
lug nuts.
seated against the wheel.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 451
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
WARNING!
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly Preparations For Jump-Start so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack Remote battery posts are located on the right side of the
follow the manufacturer's operating instructions and engine compartment for jump-starting.
precautions.
6
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor, alternator or electrical system may occur.
452 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Remote Battery Post Locations 1 -- Remote Positive (+) Post 2 -- Remote Negative (-) Post
WARNING!
· Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan blades.
· Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
· Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 453
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle.
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle. 6
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
454 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury. Only use the specific ground point, do not use any other exposed metal parts.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable from the remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system inspected at your authorized dealer.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 455
CAUTION!
NOTE: Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL for
draw power from the vehicle's battery, even when not more than 2 seconds, you must push the brake pedal to
in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if engage DRIVE or REVERSE.
plugged in long enough without engine operation,
the vehicle's battery will discharge sufficiently to
CAUTION!
degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the en- 6 gine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking-motion
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the the risk of transmission failure during prolonged
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE
and REVERSE while gently pushing the accelerator. Use
the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will
maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the
wheels or racing the engine.
456 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: Push the ESC Off switch, to place the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system in Partial Off mode, before rocking the vehicle. Refer to "Electronic Brake Control" in "Starting And Operating" for further information. Once the vehicle has been freed, push the ESC Off switch again to restore ESC On mode.
CAUTION!
· When "rocking" a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may result.
· Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
MANUAL PARK RELEASE
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the parking brake, before activating the Manual Park Release. Activating the Manual Park Release will allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by the parking brake or by proper connection to a tow vehicle. Activating the Manual Park Release on an unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury or death for those in or around the vehicle.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 457
In order to push or tow the vehicle in cases where the transmission will not shift out of PARK (such as a dead battery), a Manual Park Release is available.
Follow these steps to use the Manual Park Release:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Remove the console storage bin to access the Manual Park Release lever.
6
458 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. Insert the screwdriver into the slot in the center of the lever, and disengage the lever locking tab by pushing it to the right.
Manual Park Release Lever Location
3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, fish the tether strap up through the opening in the console base.
Locking Tab Location
5. While holding the locking tab in the disengaged position, pull the tether strap to rotate the lever up and rearward, until it locks in place in the vertical position. The vehicle is now out of PARK and can be towed. Release the parking brake only when the vehicle is securely connected to a tow vehicle.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 459
To Reset The Manual Park Release:
1. Push the latch (at the base of the lever, on the rear side) rearward (away from the lever) to unlatch the lever.
2. Rotate the Manual Park Release lever forward and down, to its original position, until the locking tab snaps into place to secure the lever.
3. Pull up gently on the tether strap to confirm that the
lever is locked in its stowed position.
6
4. Tuck the tether strap into the base of the console.
Reinstall the console storage bin.
Tether Strap Location
460 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Towing Condition Flat Tow
Wheels OFF The Ground
NONE
RWD MODELS
If transmission is operable:
· Transmission in NEUTRAL
· 30 mph (48 km/h) max speed
· 30 miles (48 km) max distance
AWD MODELS NOT ALLOWED
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 461
Towing Condition Wheel Lift or Dolly Tow
Flatbed
Wheels OFF The Ground Front Rear
ALL
RWD MODELS
AWD MODELS
NOT RECOMMENDED (but, if used, same limi-
tations as above)
NOT ALLOWED
NOT RECOMMENDED
NOT RECOMMENDED,
but, if used: · Ignition in ON/RUN
position · Transmission in NEU-
6
TRAL (NOT in Park)
BEST METHOD
BEST METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment manufacturer's instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles under tow must be observed.
462 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN position, not the ACC position.
If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle's battery is discharged, refer to Manual Park Release in this section for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK for towing.
CAUTION!
· DO NOT use sling-type equipment when towing. Vehicle damage may occur.
· When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not attach to front or rear suspension components. Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing.
· The manufacturer does not recommend towing this vehicle using a tow dolly. Vehicle damage may occur.
All Wheel Drive (AWD) Models
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If the transmission and drivetrain are operable, AWD models can also be towed with the ignition in the ON/RUN position, the transmission in NEUTRAL (not in PARK!), and the rear wheels OFF the ground with no limitation on speed or distance. Since the ignition MUST be in the ON/RUN position to tow in this manner, AWD vehicles must be towed with ALL FOUR wheels OFF the ground (e.g. on a flatbed truck) if the Key Fob is unavailable.
CAUTION!
· Towing this vehicle using any other method can cause severe transmission and/or transfer case damage.
· Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 463
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than 30 miles (48 km), then the only acceptable method of towing is with a flatbed truck.
CAUTION!
Rear-Wheel Drive (RWD) Models
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission damage. Dam-
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
age from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
6
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmission is operable, this vehicle may be flat towed (with all four Without The Key Fob
wheels on the ground) under the following conditions: Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
· The transmission must be in NEUTRAL.
with the ignition in the LOCK/OFF position. The only
approved method of towing without the Key Fob is with
· The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h). a flatbed truck. Proper towing equipment is necessary to
· The towing distance must not exceed 30 miles (48 km). prevent damage to the vehicle.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
ENGINE COMPARTMENT -- 3.6L . . . . . . . . . .467 ENGINE COMPARTMENT -- 5.7L . . . . . . . . . .468 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM -- OBD II . .469 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469 REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .472
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472 Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477 Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477 Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .479 A/C Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480 Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482 7 Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483 Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483 Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
466 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
Front Turn Signal Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
All Wheel Drive (AWD) -- If Equipped . . . . .496 Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497 Front/Rear Side Marker Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . .523
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504 Front Power Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . .505 Rear Power Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . .510
VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
Rear Backup Lamp And Turn Signal Lamps . . .523 License Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL). . .523 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521 Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
Low Beam And High Beam Headlamp . . . . . .521
ENGINE COMPARTMENT -- 3.6L
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 467
7
1 -- Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post) 2 -- Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 3 -- Remote Jump Start (Negative Battery Post)
4 -- Engine Oil Dipstick
7 -- Air Cleaner Filter
5 -- Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 8 -- Engine Oil Fill
6 -- Engine Coolant Reservoir
9 -- Washer Fluid Reservoir
468 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT -- 5.7L
1 -- Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post) 2 -- Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 3 -- Remote Jump Start (Negative Battery Post)
4 -- Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 7 -- Engine Oil Fill
5 -- Engine Coolant Reservoir
8 -- Engine Oil Dipstick
6 -- Air Cleaner Filter
9 -- Washer Fluid Reservoir
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 469
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM -- OBD II
CAUTION!
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic transmission control systems. When these systems are operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
· Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emissions control system. It could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed.
· If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
will turn on the "Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)". It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
7
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al- PROGRAMS
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
soon as possible.
an inspection of your vehicle's emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the "Malfunction
470 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Indicator Light (MIL)" is functioning and is not on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II system is ready for testing.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, you will see the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your vehicle's OBD II system is ready, you must do the following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not crank or start the engine.
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start this test over.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will happen:
· The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This means that your vehicle's OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I/M station.
· The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you place the ignition in the off position or start the engine. This means that your vehicle's OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 471
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, DEALER SERVICE
you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update. A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for
Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system is your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal attempting any procedure yourself.
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine penalties being assessed against you.
running.
7
REPLACEMENT PARTS
WARNING!
Use of genuine MOPAR® parts for normal/scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed performance. Damage or failures caused by the use of non-MOPAR® parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
472 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed "Maintenance Schedule", there are other components which may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
· Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could result in more costly repairs, damage to other components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized dealer or qualified repair center.
CAUTION! (Continued) · Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine, transmission, power steering or air conditioning. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed because of component malfunction, use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level -- 3.6L Engine
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 473
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to Checking Oil Level -- 5.7L Engine
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
fully warmed engine is shut off.
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the fully warmed engine is shut off.
dipstick. Adding 1.0 quart (1.0 liter) of oil when the Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
reading is at the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
on these engines.
the oil level in the "SAFE" range. Adding 1.0 quart (1.0
CAUTION!
liter) of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the "SAFE" range will result in an oil level at the top of the 7
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or "SAFE" range on these engines.
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
474 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" for further information.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months, whichever occurs first.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute (API). The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 475
Engine Oil Viscosity -- 3.6L Engine
Engine Oil Viscosity -- 5.7L Engine
MOPAR® SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to Chrysler MOPAR® SAE 5W-20 engine oil or equivalent such as
Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil®, Shell Pennzoil® or Shell Helix® is recommended for all oper-
Helix® or equivalent is recommended for all operating ating temperatures. This engine oil improves low tem-
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature perature starting and vehicle fuel economy.
starting and vehicle fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on engine oil filler cap location, refer to "Engine Compart-
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the "Engine Com- ment" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further informa-
partment" illustration in this section.
tion.
7
NOTE: MOPAR® SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to NOTE: Vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine must use
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil®, SAE 5W-20 oil. Failure to do so may result in improper
Shell Helix® or equivalent may be used when SAE 5W-20 operation of the Fuel Saver Technology. Refer to "Fuel
engine oil meeting MS-6395 is not available.
Saver Technology If Equipped" in "Starting And Oper-
ating" for further information.
476 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Lubricants that do not have both, the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recommended oil quality requirements are met, and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed.
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every engine oil change.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
Engine Oil Filter Selection
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
This manufacturer's engines have a full-flow type oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine oil filters are a high quality oil filter and are recommended.
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 477
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" for the proper The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
maintenance intervals.
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine air
WARNING!
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recom-
mended. The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine Maintenance-Free Battery
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury.
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic main-
tenance required.
7
NOTE: The battery is stored under an access cover in
the trunk. Remote battery terminals are located in the
engine compartment for jump starting. Refer to "Jump-
Starting Procedures" in "What To Do In Emergencies"
for further information.
478 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Battery Location
WARNING! · Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water. · Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other. · Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling. · The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that should not be disconnected and should only be replaced with a battery of the same type (vented).
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 479
CAUTION!
cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.
· It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
WARNING!
positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion. · If a "fast charger" is used while the battery is in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use a "fast charger" to provide starting voltage.
· Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD, 7 for further warranty information.
· The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
Air Conditioner Maintenance
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
For best possible performance, your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season. This service should include
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician.
480 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R134a -- If Equipped
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealer or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling HFO 1234yf -- If Equipped
HFO 1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product with a low GWP (Global Warming Potential). However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealer or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
A/C Air Filter
The filter is located in the fresh air inlet under the hood, behind a removable panel in the cowl on the passenger side of the vehicle, next to the windshield wipers. When installing a new filter, ensure its proper orientation.
1. Remove the access door in the cowl screen by pressing the retaining clips.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 481
Access Door 2. Unsnap both ends and lift the filter access cover.
7 Filter Access Cover 3. Remove the used filter.
4. Install the new filter with arrows pointing in the direction of airflow, which is toward the rear of the vehicle (text and arrows on the filter will indicate this).
482 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Body Lubrication
A/C Air Filter 5. Close the filter access cover.
Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" for the proper maintenance intervals.
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as MOPAR® Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function. When performing other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR® Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 483
Adding Washer Fluid
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a front of the engine compartment. Be sure to check the
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumula- fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
tions of salt or road film.
windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use residual water.
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, apply some
from a dry windshield.
washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
blades clean. This will help blade performance. To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
7
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc. in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering,
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers.
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions
are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as neces-
sary.
484 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gallon (4 liters) of washer fluid when the message "Low Washer Fluid" appears in the Driver Information Display (DID).
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system; or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle; or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
· Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer to "Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas" in "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle" for further information.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 485
WARNING! (Continued) · A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
· The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.
· Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
CAUTION! (Continued)
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat, resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is im- 7 portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
(Continued)
486 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer's specifications, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
· Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition, when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion.
· Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle.
· Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
Cooling System
WARNING!
· When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or cycle the ignition switch to the LOCK position. The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time the ignition switch is in the ON position.
· You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 487
Coolant Checks
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (anti-
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12 freeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery months (before the onset of freezing weather, where bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with Cooling System -- Drain, Flush And Refill
fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by an
authorized dealer. Check the front of the radiator for any NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
face of the condenser.
needed to be added to the system please contact your
local authorized dealer.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to MS.90032).
7
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" for the proper maintenance intervals.
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
488 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further information.
CAUTION!
· Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any "globally compatible" coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible. · Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator. · This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 489
miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reduc- · Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-
ing this extended maintenance period, it is important that ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conform- (antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
ing to MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
Please review these recommendations for using Organic engine cooling system.
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) Please note that it is the owner's responsibility to main-
that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan- tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-
dard MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze): cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
· We recommend using MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant the vehicle is operated.
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive NOTE:
Technology) that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS.90032.
· Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
7
· Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan- needed to be added to the system please contact your
dard MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concen- local authorized dealer.
trations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below -34° F (-37° C) are anticipated.
· Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recommended and can result in cooling system damage. If
490 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency, have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant (antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery tank.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
· Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure. · Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 491
Coolant Level
Points To Remember
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor-
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
indicated on the bottle.
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine no need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
unless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
point or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
7
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS.90032 should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
· Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
· Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion bottle must also be protected against freezing.
492 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
· If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are required, the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks.
· Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components.
· Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
· Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the condenser clean.
· Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake system components should be inspected periodically. Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" for the proper maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible brake damage. You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 493
Master Cylinder -- Brake Fluid Level Check
Use only manufacturer's recommended brake fluid. Re-
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately fer to "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts" in "Mainif the brake system warning light indicates system fail- taining Your Vehicle" for further information.
ure. WARNING!
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when performing underhood services.
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the "FULL" mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir.
· Use only manufacturer's recommended brake fluid. Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake system and/or
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may impair its performance. The proper type of brake 7
cause leaking in the system.
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the require- reservoir.
ments described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc · To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
pads wear. However, low fluid level may be caused by a been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
leak and a checkup may be needed.
(Continued)
494 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could result in a collision. · Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces. · Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure. This could result in a collision.
Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture.
Automatic Transmission
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use only the manufacturer's specified transmission fluid. Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts" in this section for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain the transmission fluid at the correct level using the recommended fluid. No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission; only the approved lubricant should be used.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 495
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac- Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
turer's recommended fluid may cause deterioration the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter nents. Such damage is not covered by the New
shudder. Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Parts" in this section for fluid specifications.
Fluid Level Check
Special Additives
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine
any special additives in the transmission.
fluid level checks are not required, therefore the transmis- 7
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supple-
sion has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can check your transmission fluid level using special service tools.
mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addi- If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction,
tives to the transmission. The only exception to this visit your authorized dealer immediately to have the
policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle
leaks. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmission
adversely affect seals.
damage.
496 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. However, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for any reason.
All Wheel Drive (AWD) -- If Equipped
The all wheel drive system consists of a transfer case and front differential. The exterior surface of these components should be inspected for evidence of fluid leaks. Confirmed leaks should be repaired as soon as possible.
The transfer case fluid fill/inspection plug is located in the middle of the rear housing. To inspect the transfer case fluid level, remove the fill/inspection plug. The fluid level should be even with the bottom of the hole. Use this plug to add fluid as required.
The front differential fill plug is located on the outer cover near the halfshaft attachment. To inspect the differential fluid level, remove the fill plug. The fluid level should be even with or slightly below the bottom of the hole.
Fluid Changes
Change Axle Fluid
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 497
Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" for the proper Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" for the proper
maintenance intervals.
maintenance intervals.
Rear Axle
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be inspected. If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level. Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further information.
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice, and chemicals that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contami-
7
Fluid Level Check
nants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated,
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug on the extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme condiaxle. The fluid level should be at the bottom of the fill tions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and hole. Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level. underbody protection.
Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts" in
"Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further information.
498 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are: · Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation. · Stone and gravel impact. · Insects, tree sap and tar. · Salt in the air near seacoast localities. · Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
· Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR® Car Wash, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear water.
· If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use MOPAR® Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove.
· Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR® Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
· Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 499
CAUTION!
· If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
· Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
the owner.
· Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa) · If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
Special Care
packaged and sealed.
· If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive · If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a month.
mud or stone shields behind each wheel. · Use MOPAR® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
7
· It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle.
open.
· If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint, touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.
500 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
· All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.
· To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or Black Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives or polishing compounds. They will permanently damage this finish and such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE ONLY MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular basis this is all that is required to maintain this finish.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush, or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These products may damage the wheel's protective finish. Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel's protective finish. Only MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure -- If Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner:
· Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean, dry towel.
· Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 501
· For tough stains, apply MOPAR® Total Clean, or a Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue. can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
· For grease stains, apply MOPAR® Multi-Purpose Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR® Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
· Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-
protectants on Stain Repel products.
gents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
Interior Care
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition.
Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
7
carpeting.
WARNING!
Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
MOPAR® Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery.
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes. Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
502 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents, suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic, painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
CAUTION! Damage caused by these type of products may not be covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as damage to the seat may result.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 503
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR® Total Clean, a mild soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care buckles do not work properly.
7
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
WARNING!
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
rag.
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
(Continued)
504 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued) not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
Cleaning The Center Console Cupholders Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent with the cupholder in the center console.
NOTE: The cupholder cannot be removed.
FUSES
WARNING! · When replacing a blown fuse, always use an ap-
propriate replacement fuse with the same amp
WARNING! (Continued)
rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other material. Failure to use proper fuses may result in serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage. · Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is off and that all the other services are switched off and/or disengaged. · If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer. · If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air bag system, braking system), power unit systems (engine system, gearbox system) or steering system blows, contact an authorized dealer.
(Continued)
Front Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
The Front Power Distribution Center is located in the engine compartment. This module contains fuses and relays.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 505
CAUTION!
· When installing the power distribution center cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get into the power distribution center and possibly result in an electrical system failure.
· When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If 7 a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
Front Power Distribution Center
506 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity 1 2 3
Cartridge Fuse
40 Amp Green 50 Amp Red
4
30 Amp Pink
5
40 Amp Green
6
30 Amp Pink
7
8
20 Amp Blue
9
10
11
12
13
Mini-Fuse
20 Amp Yellow 10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow 10 Amp Red
Description Fuse Spare Radiator Fan #1 If Equipped Power Steering #1 / Radiator Fan (6.2L Supercharged) If Equipped
Starter Electronic Stability Control Electronic Stability Control
Fuse Spare Police Ignition Run / ACC # 2 All-Wheel Drive Module If Equipped Security If Equipped / Under hood
Lamp Police Horns
Air Conditioning Clutch Fuse Spare
Cavity 14 15 16 18 19
20 21
22
23 24 28
Cartridge Fuse
50 Amp Red 50 Amp Red
30 Amp Pink 30 Amp Pink
40 Amp Green / 20 Amp Blue Police
20 Amp Blue 20 Amp Blue
Mini-Fuse
20 Amp Yellow 20 Amp Yellow
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 507
Description
Fuse Spare
Left HID If Equipped
Right HID If Equipped
Radiator Fan #2 If Equipped
Power Steering #2 / Radiator Fan (6.2L Supercharged)
Wiper Motor
Headlamp Washers If Equipped / Police
Feed
7
Engine Cooling Pump (6.2L Supercharged) / Police Bat Feed # 3 If Equipped
Police Bat Feed # 1 If Equipped
Police Bat Feed # 3 If Equipped
Fuse Spare
508 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity 29
Cartridge Fuse
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
48
Mini-Fuse 15 Amp Blue
25 Amp Clear
25 Amp Clear 20 Amp Yellow 10 Amp Red 10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red 10 Amp Red 10 Amp Red
Description Transmission Control Module
(LA/LD Police) Fuse Spare
Engine Module Fuse Spare Fuse Spare Powertrain #1 Powertrain #2
Anti-Lock Brake Module Engine Controller/Rad Fan Relays If
Equipped Airbag Module Power Steering Module/AC Clutch Relay AWD Module/Front Axle Disconnect (LX) / Adaptive Cruise (LA) If Equipped
Cavity 49 50 51 52 53
Cartridge Fuse
Mini-Fuse
20 Amp Yellow 5 Amp Tan
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 509
Description Fuse Spare Fuse Spare Vacuum Pump Adaptive Cruise (LD/LX) If Equipped Fuse Spare
7
510 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
There is also a power distribution center located in the trunk under the spare tire access panel. This center contains fuses and relays.
Opening The Access Cover
Rear Power Distribution Center
CAUTION! · When installing the power distribution center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
allow water to get into the power distribution center and possibly result in an electrical system failure. · When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
Cavity 2 3 4 5
(Continued)
Cartridge Fuse 60 Amp Yellow
-- 60 Amp Yellow 30 Amp Pink
6
40 Amp Green
7
40 Amp Green
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 511
CAUTION! (Continued) use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
Mini-Fuse -- -- -- --
-- --
Description
Front PDC Feed #1
7
Fuse Spare
Front PDC Feed #2
Sunroof / Dome Lamp Police
Exterior Lighting #1
Exterior Lighting #2
512 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity 8 9 10
Cartridge Fuse 30 Amp Pink 40 Amp Green 30 Amp Pink
11
30 Amp Pink
12
--
15
40 Amp Green
16
20 Amp Blue
17
--
18
30 Amp Pink
19
--
Mini-Fuse -- -- --
--
20 Amp Yellow
-- -- -- --
--
Description Interior Lighting Power Locks Driver Door Control Module Passenger Door Control Module Dual USB Center Console Rear/Cigar Lighter IP If Equipped HVAC Blower Left Spot Lamp Police Fuse Spare Mod Network Interface Police Fuse -- Spare
Cavity 20 21
22
23 24 25
Cartridge Fuse --
30 Amp Pink (6.2L Supercharged)
25 Amp Clear (LD STD) --
--
--
--
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 513
Mini-Fuse
Description
--
Fuse -- Spare
--
Fuel Pump (6.2L Super-
charged)
Fuel Pump (LD STD)
20 Amp Yellow Police 10 Amp Red LA
Right Spot Lamp Police Integrated Center Stack LA
10 Amp Red 15 Amp Blue
Fuel Door/Diagnostic Port
7 Integrated Center Stack LD/LX
10 Amp Red
Tire Pressure Monitor
514 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity 26
Cartridge Fuse --
27
--
31
--
32
--
33
--
34
--
35
--
Mini-Fuse 15 Amp Blue LD/LX
25 Amp Clear LA 30 Amp Green LA 6.2L
Supercharged
25 Amp Clear 25 Amp Breaker
15 Amp Blue 15 Amp Blue
10 Amp Red
5 Amp Tan
Description
Transmission / Electronic Shift Module (LD/LX) Fuel Pump (LA) Fuel Pump (LA 6.2L Supercharged)
Amplifier If Equipped
Power Seats
HVAC Module/Cluster
Ignition Switch/RF hub Module/Steering Column Lock-LX If Equipped
Steering Column Module/Clock/Spare Police
Battery Sensor
Cavity 36 37 38
40 41 42 43 44
Cartridge Fuse -- -- --
-- -- 30 Amp Pink -- --
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 515
Mini-Fuse
Description
15 Amp Blue
Electronic Exhaust Valve If Equipped
20 Amp Yellow
Radio
15 Amp Blue LD/LX Console Power Outlet/
20 Amp Yellow LA Console Media Hub
(LD/LX)
Power Outlet Inside Arm
Rest/Console Media Hub
(LA)
--
Fuse -- Spare
7
--
Fuse -- Spare
--
Rear Defrost
20 Amp Yellow
Rear Heated Seats/ Steering Wheel Module
10 Amp Red
Park Assist / Blind Spot / Rear View Camera
516 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity 45
Cartridge Fuse --
46
--
47
--
48
--
49
--
50
--
51
--
52
--
Mini-Fuse 15 Amp Blue
-- 10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow -- --
20 Amp Yellow 10 Amp Red
Description
Cluster / Rearview Mirror / Compass(LDLX)/ Humidity Sensor
Fuse -- Spare
Adaptive Front Lighting / Auto High BEAM / Day Time Running Lamps- If Equipped
Active Suspension SRT
Fuse -- Spare
Fuse -- Spare
Front Heated Seats If Equipped
Heated Cupholders/Rear Heated Seat Switches If Equipped
Cavity 53
54 55 56 57 58 59 60
61
62 63 64
Cartridge Fuse --
-- -- -- -- -- -- --
--
-- -- --
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 517
Mini-Fuse 10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red -- -- --
10 Amp Red 20 Amp Yellow
5 Amp Tan
20 Amp Yellow
-- -- 25 Amp Breaker
Description
HVAC Module/In Car Temperature Sensor
Airbag Module (LA)
Fuse -- Spare
Fuse -- Spare
Fuse -- Spare
Airbag Module (LD/LX)
Adjustable Pedals Police
Heated Washer Nozzles
7
(LD)
Cigar Lighter (LA) If Equipped
Fuse -- Spare
Fuse -- Spare
Rear Windows (LD/LX)
518 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity 65 66 67
Cartridge Fuse -- -- --
68
--
69
--
70
--
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 days, you may want to take these steps to protect your battery.
· Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
· Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
Mini-Fuse 10 Amp Red
-- 10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
-- --
Description Airbag Module Fuse -- Spare Rain and Light Sensor/ Sunroof Dual USB Power Outlet R/A Sense (LD/LX) Rear Sunshade (LD/LX) Fuse -- Spare Fuse -- Spare
service (e.g., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.
REPLACEMENT BULBS
All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not be used for replacement. Interior Bulbs
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 519
Bulb Number
Rear Courtesy/Reading Lamps
W5W
Rear Compartment (Trunk) Lamp
562
Overhead Console Reading Lamps Visor Vanity Lamps
578
A6220
7
Glove Box Lamp If Equipped
194
Door Courtesy
562
Shift Indicator Lamp
JKLE14140
Optional Door Map Pocket/Cupholder
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer for replacement instructions.
520 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Exterior Bulbs
Low Beam/High Beam (Bi-Halogen Headlamp) Low Beam/High Beam (Bi-Xenon Headlamp) Front Turn Signal Lamp Front Park Lamp Daytime Running Lamp Front Fog Lamp If Equipped Front Sidemarker Lamp Rear Tail/Stop/Turn Lamp Rear Sidemarker Lamp Backup Lamp Center High Mount Stop Lamp (CHMSL) License Rear Fog Lamp If Equipped
Bulb Number HIR2LL
D3S (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) PSY24WSV
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 521
BULB REPLACEMENT
WARNING!
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric conditions change to allow the condensation to change back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the clearing process.
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced properly. See your authorized dealer for service.
Low Beam And High Beam Headlamp
High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID) -- If Equipped
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps, when the headlamps are turned on, there is a blue hue to the lights. This diminishes and becomes more white after
The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube. approximately 10 seconds, as the system charges.
7
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the headlamp switch off and the ignition turned to the OFF
Standard Low Beam And High Beam Headlamp
position. Because of this, you should not attempt to 1. Open the hood.
service a headlamp bulb yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for service.
NOTE: Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the headlamp assembly on the driver side of the vehicle.
522 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Reach behind the headlamp housing to access the headlamp (outboard) bulb cap.
3. Firmly grasp the cap and rotate it counterclockwise to unlock it.
4. Twist the headlamp bulb assembly counterclockwise, and then pull it out of the headlamp assembly.
5. Disconnect the bulb from the wiring assembly and install the replacement bulb.
6. Reinstall the bulb and wiring assembly into the headlamp assembly, and then turn it clockwise.
7. Install the headlamp bulb cap in the headlamp housing and rotate it clockwise to lock it.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
Front Turn Signal Lamps
1. Open the hood.
NOTE: Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the headlamp assembly on the driver side of the vehicle.
2. Reach behind the headlamp housing to access the turn signal (inboard) bulb cap.
3. Firmly grasp the cap and rotate it counterclockwise to unlock it.
4. Squeeze the two tabs on the side of the bulb socket and pull straight out from the lamp assembly.
5. Disconnect the bulb from the wiring connector and install the replacement bulb.
6. Install the bulb and connector assembly straight into the lamp until it locks in place.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 523
Rear Backup Lamp And Turn Signal Lamps
The Rear Backup and Turn Signal Lamp use LED sources that are not serviceable separately. The Rear Lamps must be replaced as an assembly, please see your authorized dealer.
License Lamp
7. Install the turn signal bulb cap in the headlamp The License Lamp uses an LED source that is not
housing and rotate clockwise to lock in place.
serviceable separately. The License Lamp must be re-
Front Fog Lamp
placed as an assembly, see your authorized dealer.
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
7
The Front Fog Lamps use LED sources that are not
serviceable separately. The Front Fog Lamp must be The CHMSL Lamp uses LED sources that are not service-
replaced as an assembly, see your authorized dealer.
able separately. The CHMSL Lamp must be replaced as
Front/Rear Side Marker Lamp
an assembly, see your authorized dealer
The Side Markers use LED lamps that are not serviceable separately. The Side Markers must be replaced as an assembly, see your authorized dealer.
524 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S.
Fuel (Approximate)
All Engines
18.5 Gallons
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
6 Quarts
5.7 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
7 Quarts
Cooling System *
3.6 Liter Engine We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent.
10 Quarts
5.7 Liter Engine without Severe Duty II Cooling System We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula.
14.5 Quarts
5.7 Liter Engine with Severe Duty II Cooling System We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula.
15 Quarts
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
Metric 69.9 Liters 5.6 Liters 6.6 Liters 9.5 Liters 13.9 Liters 14.3 Liters
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Engine Coolant
Engine Oil
Engine Oil Filter Spark Plugs Fuel Selection 3.6L Engine Fuel Selection 5.7L Engine
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 525
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology).
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 En-
gine Oil, meeting the requirements of Chrysler Mate-
rial Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR®, Pennzoil®,
and Shell Helix®. Refer to your engine oil filler cap
7
for correct SAE grade.
We recommend you use a MOPAR® Engine Oil Filter.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs.
87 Octane.
87 Octane Acceptable 89 Octane Recommended.
526 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
· Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any "globally compatible" coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
· Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
· This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
Chassis Component Automatic Transmission 8-Speed Transmission
Brake Master Cylinder
Front Axle Rear Axle Transfer Case
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 527
Fluid, Lubricant, Or Genuine Part Use only MOPAR® ZF 8&9 Speed ATFTM Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission. We recommend you use MOPAR® DOT 3 and SAE J1703. If DOT 3 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. We recommend you use MOPAR® Synthetic Gear Lu- 7 bricant SAE 75W90 (API GL-5). We recommend you use MOPAR® OD Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W85 (API GL-5). We recommend you use MOPAR® Transfer Case Lubricant for BorgWarner 4440.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . .530
Maintenance Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532
8
530 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change indicator system. The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change indicator message will illuminate. This means that service is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will influence when the "Change Oil" or "Oil Change Required" message is displayed. Severe Operating Conditions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
The "Oil Change Required" message will be displayed in the DID and a single chime will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under "Driver Information Dispay (DID)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months, whichever comes first.
Severe Duty All Models
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off road environment. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
· Check engine oil level
· Check windshield washer fluid level
· Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before your next scheduled service.
· Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake master cylinder, and power steering (if equipped) and fill as needed.
· Check function of all interior and exterior lights
Required Maintenance Intervals.
Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following page for the required maintenance intervals.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 531
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
· Change oil and filter
· Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular
wear, even if it occurs before your next scheduled
service
· Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
required
· Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses
and park brake
· Inspect engine cooling system protection and
hoses
8
· Inspect exhaust system
· Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions
532 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Maintenance Chart
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Or Kilometers:
32,000 48,000 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000 128,000 144,000 160,000 176,000 192,000 208,000 224,000 240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints.
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, boot seals, and replace if necessary.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect the rear axle fluid. Inspect the front axle fluid (All Wheel Drive Only).
X
X
X
X
Inspect the brake linings, replace as necessary. X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Adjust park brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect transfer case fluid (All Wheel Drive Only).
X
X
X
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 533
20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Or Kilometers:
32,000 48,000 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000 128,000 144,000 160,000 176,000 192,000 208,000 224,000 240,000
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air filter.
X
X
X
X
X
Replace cabin/air conditioning filter.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Replace spark plugs.**
X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first.
X
X8
Inspect the transfer case fluid. Change the transfer
case fluid; if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or frequent
X
X
trailer towing. (All Wheel Drive Only).
534 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Or Kilometers:
32,000 48,000 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000 128,000 144,000 160,000 176,000 192,000 208,000 224,000 240,000
Change the rear axle fluid and on models
equipped with All Wheel Drive (AWD) change the
front axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the
X
following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or frequent
trailer towing.
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary.
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.
X
X
X
WARNING!
· You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
· Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an accident.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 535
8
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
Prepare For The Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . .539 Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . .539 MOPAR® PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . .543
FCA US LLC Customer Center . . . . . . . . . . . .540 Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . .540
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543 9
In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541 In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . .544
538 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545
Treadwear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545
Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545 Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 539
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR Be Reasonable With Requests
YOUR VEHICLE
If you list a number of items and you must have your
Prepare For The Appointment
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle's
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment.
service history. This can often provide a clue to the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
current problem.
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
Prepare A List
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the with our products and services.
specific work you want done. If you've had an accident Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. 9
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
service advisor know.
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer's authorized dealer have the
540 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with this process. · If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer. They want to know if you need assistance.
· If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern, you may contact the manufacturer's customer center.
Any communication to the manufacturer's customer center should include the following information: · Owner's name and address
· Owner's telephone number (home and office)
· Authorized dealer name
· Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) · Vehicle delivery date and mileage FCA US LLC Customer Center P.O. Box 218004 Auburn Hills, MI 483218004 Phone: (800) 247-9753 Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center P.O. Box 1621 Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 541
In Mexico Contact Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240 Sante Fe C.P. 05109 Mexico, D. F.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Service Contract
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the the manufacturer's service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni- manufacturer's service contract, you will receive Plan
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you 9
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter have any questions about the service contract, call the
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the manufacturer's Service Contract National Customer
manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call
(800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).
542 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer's service contract. It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer's service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer's service contract, and you require service after the manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract documents, and contact the person listed in those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only), some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the DVD, for the terms and provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 543
MOPAR® PARTS
MOPAR® fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your authorized dealer, and the manufacturer.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424- 9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could You can also obtain other information about motor cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety In Canada
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
9
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans-
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/
544 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
To order the following manuals, you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintaining, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system, and/or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
Owner's Manuals
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 545
Call toll free at:
Treadwear
· 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.) · 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) Or Visit us on the Worldwide Web at: · www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.
The following tire grading categories were established by Traction Grades
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire's manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades represent the tire's ability to stop on
9
your vehicle.
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
requirements in addition to these grades.
546 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
INDEX
10
548 INDEX
About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358, 360 ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) . . .174 Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .488 Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417 Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483 Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412 Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167 Air Bag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57, 58
Advance Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58 Air Bag Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57 Air Bag Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69, 70 Driver Knee Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62 Enhanced Accident Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68 Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72 Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57, 58 If A Deployment Occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67 Knee Impact Bolsters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Maintaining Your Air Bag System . . . . . . . . . . . .71 Side Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62 Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 Air Bag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57 Air Bag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69, 70, 96, 263 Air Bag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71 Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .477 Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479 Air Conditioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303 Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313, 480 Air Conditioning, Operating Tips. . . . . . . . . . .312, 314 Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479, 480 Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311, 479 Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385 Alarm Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Alarm Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263 Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
INDEX 549
Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494, 495 All Wheel Drive (AWD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352, 496 Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527 Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488, 524 Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490 Auto Unlock, Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361 Auto Up Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263 Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527 Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497 Axle Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527 Arming System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Assist, Hill Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477 Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . .24 Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31, 32 Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477 Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 Remote Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Automatic High Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . .303, 311 Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342, 496 Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496, 527 B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379 10 Fluid And Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496 Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364 Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496 Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
550 INDEX
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527 Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360, 492
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361 Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493, 527 Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493 Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263, 360 Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342 Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157 Bulb Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519, 521 Bulbs, Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98, 519
Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225 Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524 Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475 Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95, 413 Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255 Cargo Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255 Cargo (Vehicle Loading) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421 Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498 Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302 Certification Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421 Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396 Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441 Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373 Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator
Light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263, 469 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94 Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73 Child Restraints
Booster Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77 Center Seat LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85 Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
INDEX 551
Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90 Connector
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt . . . . . . . .86 UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
Infants And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75 Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) . . . . . . . . . .299
Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint . . . .85 Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children . . . . . . .80 Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
Older Children And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . .76 Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .490
Seating Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79 Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410 Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
Cleaning
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487, 491
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500 Disposal Of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303 Drain, Flush, And Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277 Points To Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
Coin Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250 Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338 Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490 Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . .488, 524, 525 10
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391 Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
Cruise Control (Speed Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
552 INDEX
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246, 504 Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539 Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72 Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . .159 Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151 Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471 Deck Lid, Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 Deck Lid, Power Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 Defroster, Rear Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256 Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160 Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469 Dimmer Switch, Headlight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154 Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472, 473 Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
Disposal Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
Door Locks Child-Protection Door Lock -- Rear Doors . . . . . .32 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22, 29 Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Key Fob Emergency Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Driver Information Display
DID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274 Instrument Cluster Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274 Driver Information Display (DID) Driver Information Display (DID) . . . . . . . . . . . .272 Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
INDEX 553
E-85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414 Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .469
Electrical Power Outlets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
Electric Rear Window Defrost. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256 Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116 Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361 Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364 Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472, 473
Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363 Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467, 468
Electronic Power Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . .505 Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . .169, 174 Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487, 525
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365 Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
Emergency Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95, 413
Emergency, In Case Of
Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455 Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451 Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472, 524, 525 Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475 10
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460 Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474, 524
Emergency Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
554 INDEX
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335 Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263 Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475 Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475 Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .68 Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411 Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72 Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95, 413 Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95, 484 Exterior Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 Exterior Lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Filler Location Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263 Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477 Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313, 480
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476, 525 Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476 Flashers Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438 Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98, 154, 263 Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154 Flexible Fuel Vehicles Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414, 415 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416 Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338 Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250 Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527 Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524 Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99 Fluid Level Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
INDEX 555
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495 Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409, 525 Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472, 473 Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524 Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496 Fuel, Flexible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414 Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . .525 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504 Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152, 263 Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140 Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . .230, 236 Forward Collision Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200 Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455 Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409 Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410 Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412 Gauges Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410 Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263 Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263 Filler Door (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263 Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263 Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263 Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344 10 Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409 Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411 Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
556 INDEX
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422, 424 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422, 424 GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
Hazard Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502 Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . .154 Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152 On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149, 162 Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
Headlight Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136 Head Rests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117 Heated Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340 High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . . .154 Hill Start Assist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368 Hitches
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427 Holder, Coin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250 Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Ignition Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
INDEX 557
Instrument Panel And Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261 Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503 Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501 Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157 Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33, 336
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers). . . . . . . . . . . . .160 Keyless Enter-N-GoTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Enter The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
iPod®/USB/MP3 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299 Lock The Vehicle's Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22, 291
Passive Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442 Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . .33, 291
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441 Unlock From The Driver's Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451 Unlock From The Passenger Side . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Key Fob. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 Keyless Go. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . .18, 24
10
Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . .18, 24 Lane Change And Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Remote Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
558 INDEX
LaneSense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204 Lap/Shoulder Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146 Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409 Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99 Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394 Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98, 519 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98, 147
Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69, 70, 96, 263 Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263 Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263 Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370 Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263, 360 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521 Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151 Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . .153, 154 Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . . . .370
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152, 263 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147, 521 Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152 Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . .149, 162 Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154 High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263 High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154 Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157 Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157 License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523 Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152 Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . .263 Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155 Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) . . . . . . . . . . .159
INDEX 559
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154 Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155, 228 Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263 Low Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399 Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263 Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482 Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519, 521 Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439 Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . .263 Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . .263, 399 Maintenance Free Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477 Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472 Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98, 153, 154 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530 Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118 Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . .263, 469 Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . .263 Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544 Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421, 423 Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493 Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423 Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379 Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142 Load Leveling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258 Memory Seats And Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142 Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411 Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108 10 Auto Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116 Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
560 INDEX
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117 Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108 Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118 Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399 MOPAR® Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471, 543 MTBE/ETBE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411 Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel). . . . . . . . . . . . .409, 525 Odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263 Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274, 472, 525
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524 Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472, 473 Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472, 473 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476 Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476, 525 Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476 Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474 Materials Added To . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476 Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474, 524 Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476 Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475, 524 Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476 Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469 Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469 Operator Manual (Owner's Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438 Owner's Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . .4, 544
Paddle Shifters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350
INDEX 561
Paddle Shift Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350 Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Pregnant Women And Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358 Preparation For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
ParkSense® System, Rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210 Pretensioners
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154 Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Passive Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
Pedals, Adjustable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167 Programming Transmitters (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .21
Pets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
Placard, Tire And Loading Information . . . . . . . . . .380 Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387
Power
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .490
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360 Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510 Radio (Sound Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116 Rear Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497 Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . .242 Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225 10
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129 Rear Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238 Rear ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
562 INDEX
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140 Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256 Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256 Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72 Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436 Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410 Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480 Release, Hood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146 Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152 Reminder, Seat Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 Remote Control
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 FCC General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . .18, 24 Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . .18, 24
Remote Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . .301 Remote Starting Exit Remote Start Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 Uconnect® Customer Programmable Features . . .294 Uconnect® Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294 Remote Starting System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Remote Trunk Release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519 Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471 Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
INDEX 563
Restraint, Head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136 Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73 Seat Belt Pretensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455 Seat Belt System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397 Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96 Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46, 96
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . .52
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Safety, Exhaust Gas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95 Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372 Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46, 47, 50
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530 Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Seat Belt
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) . . . . . . . . . . .55 Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55 Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 10
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
564 INDEX
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129 Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140 Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140 Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129 Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525 SENTRY KEY® FCC General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539 Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
Service Engine Soon Light (Malfunction Indicator) . .263 Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544 Setting The Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277 Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340, 342 Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 Side View Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 Signals, Turn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98, 154, 263 Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389 Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391, 392, 442 Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525 Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525 Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525 Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . .169, 174 Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26, 335
INDEX 565
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335 Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338 Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag . . . . . . . . .58
Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338 Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Starting And Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335 Tachometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
Steering
Telescoping Steering Column. . . . . . . . . . . . . .164, 165
Column Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153 Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC). . . . . . .303, 311
Column Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164 Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . .263
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164, 165 Tilt Steering Column. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164, 165
Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166 Time Delay, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164, 165 Tire And Loading Information Placard . . . . . . .379, 380
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301 Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .301 Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98, 384, 545
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518 Aging (Life Of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313, 518 Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384 Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396 10
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455 Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229 Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
566 INDEX
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384 High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387 Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385 Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441, 444 Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394 Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379, 381 Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .399 Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263 Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545 Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394 Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372, 384 Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389 Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442 Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432 Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372 Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429 To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460 Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428 Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436 Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428 Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome . . . . . . . . . . .436 Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353 Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423 Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436 Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427 Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430 Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435 Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433 Trailer Towing Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428
INDEX 567
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428 Trunk Release Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496 Turn Signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154, 263
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496, 527
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497 UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342 Uconnect®
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342, 494 Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . .294
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494, 527 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494 Uconnect® Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22, 23, 294
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340 Uconnect® Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22, 32
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless
Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . .33, 291
Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . .33, 291
Transmitter Programming (Remote Keyless
Uconnect® Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21, 24 Uconnect® Voice Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . .21 Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . .299
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393 Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409 Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263 Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 10
Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42, 44
Trunk Release, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
568 INDEX
Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381, 421, 423 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Vehicle Security Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . .18 Vehicle Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313, 518 Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475 Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438 Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .263 Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542 Washer
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483 Washers, Windshield. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161, 483 Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498 Water
Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
Wheel And Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500 Wheel And Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500 Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42, 242 Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Reset Auto-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159, 161 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483 Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483 Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483 Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160 Wipers, Rain Sensitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle's electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible. The negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the vehicle's electronic systems.
FCA US LLC 1155CC448811--112266-A-ACC
ThirTdhEirdditEiodnitRioenv. 1
PPrriinntteedd iinn UU..SS..AA..
Acrobat Distiller 8.0.0 (Windows)